From 5db53f3e80dee2d9dff5e534f9e9fe1db17c9936 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Joern Engel <joern@logfs.org>
Date: Fri, 20 Nov 2009 20:13:39 +0100
Subject: [LogFS] add new flash file system

This is a new flash file system. See
Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt

Signed-off-by: Joern Engel <joern@logfs.org>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX  |   2 +
 Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt | 241 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 2 files changed, 243 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
index f15621ee5599..d362aa543b27 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
@@ -62,6 +62,8 @@ jfs.txt
 	- info and mount options for the JFS filesystem.
 locks.txt
 	- info on file locking implementations, flock() vs. fcntl(), etc.
+logfs.txt
+	- info on the LogFS flash filesystem.
 mandatory-locking.txt
 	- info on the Linux implementation of Sys V mandatory file locking.
 ncpfs.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e64c94ba401a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/logfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+
+The LogFS Flash Filesystem
+==========================
+
+Specification
+=============
+
+Superblocks
+-----------
+
+Two superblocks exist at the beginning and end of the filesystem.
+Each superblock is 256 Bytes large, with another 3840 Bytes reserved
+for future purposes, making a total of 4096 Bytes.
+
+Superblock locations may differ for MTD and block devices.  On MTD the
+first non-bad block contains a superblock in the first 4096 Bytes and
+the last non-bad block contains a superblock in the last 4096 Bytes.
+On block devices, the first 4096 Bytes of the device contain the first
+superblock and the last aligned 4096 Byte-block contains the second
+superblock.
+
+For the most part, the superblocks can be considered read-only.  They
+are written only to correct errors detected within the superblocks,
+move the journal and change the filesystem parameters through tunefs.
+As a result, the superblock does not contain any fields that require
+constant updates, like the amount of free space, etc.
+
+Segments
+--------
+
+The space in the device is split up into equal-sized segments.
+Segments are the primary write unit of LogFS.  Within each segments,
+writes happen from front (low addresses) to back (high addresses.  If
+only a partial segment has been written, the segment number, the
+current position within and optionally a write buffer are stored in
+the journal.
+
+Segments are erased as a whole.  Therefore Garbage Collection may be
+required to completely free a segment before doing so.
+
+Journal
+--------
+
+The journal contains all global information about the filesystem that
+is subject to frequent change.  At mount time, it has to be scanned
+for the most recent commit entry, which contains a list of pointers to
+all currently valid entries.
+
+Object Store
+------------
+
+All space except for the superblocks and journal is part of the object
+store.  Each segment contains a segment header and a number of
+objects, each consisting of the object header and the payload.
+Objects are either inodes, directory entries (dentries), file data
+blocks or indirect blocks.
+
+Levels
+------
+
+Garbage collection (GC) may fail if all data is written
+indiscriminately.  One requirement of GC is that data is seperated
+roughly according to the distance between the tree root and the data.
+Effectively that means all file data is on level 0, indirect blocks
+are on levels 1, 2, 3 4 or 5 for 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x or 5x indirect blocks,
+respectively.  Inode file data is on level 6 for the inodes and 7-11
+for indirect blocks.
+
+Each segment contains objects of a single level only.  As a result,
+each level requires its own seperate segment to be open for writing.
+
+Inode File
+----------
+
+All inodes are stored in a special file, the inode file.  Single
+exception is the inode file's inode (master inode) which for obvious
+reasons is stored in the journal instead.  Instead of data blocks, the
+leaf nodes of the inode files are inodes.
+
+Aliases
+-------
+
+Writes in LogFS are done by means of a wandering tree.  A naïve
+implementation would require that for each write or a block, all
+parent blocks are written as well, since the block pointers have
+changed.  Such an implementation would not be very efficient.
+
+In LogFS, the block pointer changes are cached in the journal by means
+of alias entries.  Each alias consists of its logical address - inode
+number, block index, level and child number (index into block) - and
+the changed data.  Any 8-byte word can be changes in this manner.
+
+Currently aliases are used for block pointers, file size, file used
+bytes and the height of an inodes indirect tree.
+
+Segment Aliases
+---------------
+
+Related to regular aliases, these are used to handle bad blocks.
+Initially, bad blocks are handled by moving the affected segment
+content to a spare segment and noting this move in the journal with a
+segment alias, a simple (to, from) tupel.  GC will later empty this
+segment and the alias can be removed again.  This is used on MTD only.
+
+Vim
+---
+
+By cleverly predicting the life time of data, it is possible to
+seperate long-living data from short-living data and thereby reduce
+the GC overhead later.  Each type of distinc life expectency (vim) can
+have a seperate segment open for writing.  Each (level, vim) tupel can
+be open just once.  If an open segment with unknown vim is encountered
+at mount time, it is closed and ignored henceforth.
+
+Indirect Tree
+-------------
+
+Inodes in LogFS are similar to FFS-style filesystems with direct and
+indirect block pointers.  One difference is that LogFS uses a single
+indirect pointer that can be either a 1x, 2x, etc. indirect pointer.
+A height field in the inode defines the height of the indirect tree
+and thereby the indirection of the pointer.
+
+Another difference is the addressing of indirect blocks.  In LogFS,
+the first 16 pointers in the first indirect block are left empty,
+corresponding to the 16 direct pointers in the inode.  In ext2 (maybe
+others as well) the first pointer in the first indirect block
+corresponds to logical block 12, skipping the 12 direct pointers.
+So where ext2 is using arithmetic to better utilize space, LogFS keeps
+arithmetic simple and uses compression to save space.
+
+Compression
+-----------
+
+Both file data and metadata can be compressed.  Compression for file
+data can be enabled with chattr +c and disabled with chattr -c.  Doing
+so has no effect on existing data, but new data will be stored
+accordingly.  New inodes will inherit the compression flag of the
+parent directory.
+
+Metadata is always compressed.  However, the space accounting ignores
+this and charges for the uncompressed size.  Failing to do so could
+result in GC failures when, after moving some data, indirect blocks
+compress worse than previously.  Even on a 100% full medium, GC may
+not consume any extra space, so the compression gains are lost space
+to the user.
+
+However, they are not lost space to the filesystem internals.  By
+cheating the user for those bytes, the filesystem gained some slack
+space and GC will run less often and faster.
+
+Garbage Collection and Wear Leveling
+------------------------------------
+
+Garbage collection is invoked whenever the number of free segments
+falls below a threshold.  The best (known) candidate is picked based
+on the least amount of valid data contained in the segment.  All
+remaining valid data is copied elsewhere, thereby invalidating it.
+
+The GC code also checks for aliases and writes then back if their
+number gets too large.
+
+Wear leveling is done by occasionally picking a suboptimal segment for
+garbage collection.  If a stale segments erase count is significantly
+lower than the active segments' erase counts, it will be picked.  Wear
+leveling is rate limited, so it will never monopolize the device for
+more than one segment worth at a time.
+
+Values for "occasionally", "significantly lower" are compile time
+constants.
+
+Hashed directories
+------------------
+
+To satisfy efficient lookup(), directory entries are hashed and
+located based on the hash.  In order to both support large directories
+and not be overly inefficient for small directories, several hash
+tables of increasing size are used.  For each table, the hash value
+modulo the table size gives the table index.
+
+Tables sizes are chosen to limit the number of indirect blocks with a
+fully populated table to 0, 1, 2 or 3 respectively.  So the first
+table contains 16 entries, the second 512-16, etc.
+
+The last table is special in several ways.  First its size depends on
+the effective 32bit limit on telldir/seekdir cookies.  Since logfs
+uses the upper half of the address space for indirect blocks, the size
+is limited to 2^31.  Secondly the table contains hash buckets with 16
+entries each.
+
+Using single-entry buckets would result in birthday "attacks".  At
+just 2^16 used entries, hash collisions would be likely (P >= 0.5).
+My math skills are insufficient to do the combinatorics for the 17x
+collisions necessary to overflow a bucket, but testing showed that in
+10,000 runs the lowest directory fill before a bucket overflow was
+188,057,130 entries with an average of 315,149,915 entries.  So for
+directory sizes of up to a million, bucket overflows should be
+virtually impossible under normal circumstances.
+
+With carefully chosen filenames, it is obviously possible to cause an
+overflow with just 21 entries (4 higher tables + 16 entries + 1).  So
+there may be a security concern if a malicious user has write access
+to a directory.
+
+Open For Discussion
+===================
+
+Device Address Space
+--------------------
+
+A device address space is used for caching.  Both block devices and
+MTD provide functions to either read a single page or write a segment.
+Partial segments may be written for data integrity, but where possible
+complete segments are written for performance on simple block device
+flash media.
+
+Meta Inodes
+-----------
+
+Inodes are stored in the inode file, which is just a regular file for
+most purposes.  At umount time, however, the inode file needs to
+remain open until all dirty inodes are written.  So
+generic_shutdown_super() may not close this inode, but shouldn't
+complain about remaining inodes due to the inode file either.  Same
+goes for mapping inode of the device address space.
+
+Currently logfs uses a hack that essentially copies part of fs/inode.c
+code over.  A general solution would be preferred.
+
+Indirect block mapping
+----------------------
+
+With compression, the block device (or mapping inode) cannot be used
+to cache indirect blocks.  Some other place is required.  Currently
+logfs uses the top half of each inode's address space.  The low 8TB
+(on 32bit) are filled with file data, the high 8TB are used for
+indirect blocks.
+
+One problem is that 16TB files created on 64bit systems actually have
+data in the top 8TB.  But files >16TB would cause problems anyway, so
+only the limit has changed.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1c8a375185935f8106a45221bd187b7b272f97c2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Sun, 13 Dec 2009 20:41:53 -0800
Subject: ide: doc: remove compilation options section from ide-cd
 documentation

This section pointed out to compilation options which no longer exist.

VERBOSE_IDE_CD_ERRORS has been replace by config option
CONFIG_BLK_DEV_IDECD_VERBOSE_ERRORS.

STANDARD_ATAPI is no longer needed, since the non-standard drivers, which
required bcd2bin are now detected, and there's a flag for them.

NO_DOOR_LOCKING is now a sysctl parameter for cdrom drivers.

CDROM_NBLOCKS_BUFFER is not used anymore. The READAUDIO is now in cdrom.c and it
allocates as much as user space has requested to read, backing off if it fails.

TEST is not there anymore or in cdrom either. ide allows to send ATA commands
through ioctl, although it may be helpful to send MMC packets through the cdrom
layer directly.

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
---
 Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd | 39 ++-------------------------------------
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 37 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
index 2c558cd6c1ef..f4dc9de2694e 100644
--- a/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
+++ b/Documentation/cdrom/ide-cd
@@ -159,42 +159,7 @@ two arguments:  the CDROM device, and the slot number to which you wish
 to change.  If the slot number is -1, the drive is unloaded.
 
 
-4. Compilation options
-----------------------
-
-There are a few additional options which can be set when compiling the
-driver.  Most people should not need to mess with any of these; they
-are listed here simply for completeness.  A compilation option can be
-enabled by adding a line of the form `#define <option> 1' to the top
-of ide-cd.c.  All these options are disabled by default.
-
-VERBOSE_IDE_CD_ERRORS
-  If this is set, ATAPI error codes will be translated into textual
-  descriptions.  In addition, a dump is made of the command which
-  provoked the error.  This is off by default to save the memory used
-  by the (somewhat long) table of error descriptions.  
-
-STANDARD_ATAPI
-  If this is set, the code needed to deal with certain drives which do
-  not properly implement the ATAPI spec will be disabled.  If you know
-  your drive implements ATAPI properly, you can turn this on to get a
-  slightly smaller kernel.
-
-NO_DOOR_LOCKING
-  If this is set, the driver will never attempt to lock the door of
-  the drive.
-
-CDROM_NBLOCKS_BUFFER
-  This sets the size of the buffer to be used for a CDROMREADAUDIO
-  ioctl.  The default is 8.
-
-TEST
-  This currently enables an additional ioctl which enables a user-mode
-  program to execute an arbitrary packet command.  See the source for
-  details.  This should be left off unless you know what you're doing.
-
-
-5. Common problems
+4. Common problems
 ------------------
 
 This section discusses some common problems encountered when trying to
@@ -371,7 +336,7 @@ f. Data corruption.
     expense of low system performance.
 
 
-6. cdchange.c
+5. cdchange.c
 -------------
 
 /*
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0f1d683fb35d6c6f49ef696c95757f3970682a0e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Naga Chumbalkar <nagananda.chumbalkar@hp.com>
Date: Thu, 17 Dec 2009 20:18:27 +0000
Subject: [CPUFREQ] Processor Clocking Control interface driver

Processor Clocking Control (PCC) is an interface between the BIOS and OSPM.
Based on the server workload, OSPM can request what frequency it expects
from a logical CPU, and the BIOS will achieve that frequency transparently.

This patch introduces driver support for PCC. OSPM uses the PCC driver to
communicate with the BIOS via the PCC interface.

There is a Documentation file that provides a link to the PCC
Specification, and also provides a summary of the PCC interface.

Currently, certain HP ProLiant platforms implement the PCC interface. However,
any platform whose BIOS implements the PCC Specification, can utilize this
driver.

V2 --> V1 changes (based on Dominik's suggestions):
- Removed the dependency on CPU_FREQ_TABLE
- "cpufreq_stats" will no longer PANIC. Actually, it will not load anymore
because it is not applicable.
- Removed the sanity check for target frequency in the ->target routine.

NOTE: A patch to sanitize the target frequency requested by "ondemand" is
needed to ensure that the target freq < policy->min.

Can this driver be queued up for the 2.6.33 tree?

Signed-off-by: Naga Chumbalkar <nagananda.chumbalkar@hp.com>
Signed-off-by: Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Thomas Renninger <trenn@suse.de>
Signed-off-by: Dave Jones <davej@redhat.com>
---
 Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt | 207 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 207 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9e3c3b33514c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/pcc-cpufreq.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/*
+ *  pcc-cpufreq.txt - PCC interface documentation
+ *
+ *  Copyright (C) 2009 Red Hat, Matthew Garrett <mjg@redhat.com>
+ *  Copyright (C) 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
+ *      Nagananda Chumbalkar <nagananda.chumbalkar@hp.com>
+ *
+ * ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ *
+ *  This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ *  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ *  the Free Software Foundation; version 2 of the License.
+ *
+ *  This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ *  WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ *  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or NON
+ *  INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
+ *
+ *  You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ *  with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ *  675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ *
+ * ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ */
+
+
+			Processor Clocking Control Driver
+			---------------------------------
+
+Contents:
+---------
+1.	Introduction
+1.1	PCC interface
+1.1.1   Get Average Frequency
+1.1.2	Set Desired Frequency
+1.2	Platforms affected
+2.	Driver and /sys details
+2.1	scaling_available_frequencies
+2.2	cpuinfo_transition_latency
+2.3	cpuinfo_cur_freq
+2.4	related_cpus
+3.	Caveats
+
+1. Introduction:
+----------------
+Processor Clocking Control (PCC) is an interface between the platform
+firmware and OSPM. It is a mechanism for coordinating processor
+performance (ie: frequency) between the platform firmware and the OS.
+
+The PCC driver (pcc-cpufreq) allows OSPM to take advantage of the PCC
+interface.
+
+OS utilizes the PCC interface to inform platform firmware what frequency the
+OS wants for a logical processor. The platform firmware attempts to achieve
+the requested frequency. If the request for the target frequency could not be
+satisfied by platform firmware, then it usually means that power budget
+conditions are in place, and "power capping" is taking place.
+
+1.1 PCC interface:
+------------------
+The complete PCC specification is available here:
+http://www.acpica.org/download/Processor-Clocking-Control-v1p0.pdf
+
+PCC relies on a shared memory region that provides a channel for communication
+between the OS and platform firmware. PCC also implements a "doorbell" that
+is used by the OS to inform the platform firmware that a command has been
+sent.
+
+The ACPI PCCH() method is used to discover the location of the PCC shared
+memory region. The shared memory region header contains the "command" and
+"status" interface. PCCH() also contains details on how to access the platform
+doorbell.
+
+The following commands are supported by the PCC interface:
+* Get Average Frequency
+* Set Desired Frequency
+
+The ACPI PCCP() method is implemented for each logical processor and is
+used to discover the offsets for the input and output buffers in the shared
+memory region.
+
+When PCC mode is enabled, the platform will not expose processor performance
+or throttle states (_PSS, _TSS and related ACPI objects) to OSPM. Therefore,
+the native P-state driver (such as acpi-cpufreq for Intel, powernow-k8 for
+AMD) will not load.
+
+However, OSPM remains in control of policy. The governor (eg: "ondemand")
+computes the required performance for each processor based on server workload.
+The PCC driver fills in the command interface, and the input buffer and
+communicates the request to the platform firmware. The platform firmware is
+responsible for delivering the requested performance.
+
+Each PCC command is "global" in scope and can affect all the logical CPUs in
+the system. Therefore, PCC is capable of performing "group" updates. With PCC
+the OS is capable of getting/setting the frequency of all the logical CPUs in
+the system with a single call to the BIOS.
+
+1.1.1 Get Average Frequency:
+----------------------------
+This command is used by the OSPM to query the running frequency of the
+processor since the last time this command was completed. The output buffer
+indicates the average unhalted frequency of the logical processor expressed as
+a percentage of the nominal (ie: maximum) CPU frequency. The output buffer
+also signifies if the CPU frequency is limited by a power budget condition.
+
+1.1.2 Set Desired Frequency:
+----------------------------
+This command is used by the OSPM to communicate to the platform firmware the
+desired frequency for a logical processor. The output buffer is currently
+ignored by OSPM. The next invocation of "Get Average Frequency" will inform
+OSPM if the desired frequency was achieved or not.
+
+1.2 Platforms affected:
+-----------------------
+The PCC driver will load on any system where the platform firmware:
+* supports the PCC interface, and the associated PCCH() and PCCP() methods
+* assumes responsibility for managing the hardware clocking controls in order
+to deliver the requested processor performance
+
+Currently, certain HP ProLiant platforms implement the PCC interface. On those
+platforms PCC is the "default" choice.
+
+However, it is possible to disable this interface via a BIOS setting. In
+such an instance, as is also the case on platforms where the PCC interface
+is not implemented, the PCC driver will fail to load silently.
+
+2. Driver and /sys details:
+---------------------------
+When the driver loads, it merely prints the lowest and the highest CPU
+frequencies supported by the platform firmware.
+
+The PCC driver loads with a message such as:
+pcc-cpufreq: (v1.00.00) driver loaded with frequency limits: 1600 MHz, 2933
+MHz
+
+This means that the OPSM can request the CPU to run at any frequency in
+between the limits (1600 MHz, and 2933 MHz) specified in the message.
+
+Internally, there is no need for the driver to convert the "target" frequency
+to a corresponding P-state.
+
+The VERSION number for the driver will be of the format v.xy.ab.
+eg: 1.00.02
+   ----- --
+    |    |
+    |    -- this will increase with bug fixes/enhancements to the driver
+    |-- this is the version of the PCC specification the driver adheres to
+
+
+The following is a brief discussion on some of the fields exported via the
+/sys filesystem and how their values are affected by the PCC driver:
+
+2.1 scaling_available_frequencies:
+----------------------------------
+scaling_available_frequencies is not created in /sys. No intermediate
+frequencies need to be listed because the BIOS will try to achieve any
+frequency, within limits, requested by the governor. A frequency does not have
+to be strictly associated with a P-state.
+
+2.2 cpuinfo_transition_latency:
+-------------------------------
+The cpuinfo_transition_latency field is 0. The PCC specification does
+not include a field to expose this value currently.
+
+2.3 cpuinfo_cur_freq:
+---------------------
+A) Often cpuinfo_cur_freq will show a value different than what is declared
+in the scaling_available_frequencies or scaling_cur_freq, or scaling_max_freq.
+This is due to "turbo boost" available on recent Intel processors. If certain
+conditions are met the BIOS can achieve a slightly higher speed than requested
+by OSPM. An example:
+
+scaling_cur_freq	: 2933000
+cpuinfo_cur_freq	: 3196000
+
+B) There is a round-off error associated with the cpuinfo_cur_freq value.
+Since the driver obtains the current frequency as a "percentage" (%) of the
+nominal frequency from the BIOS, sometimes, the values displayed by
+scaling_cur_freq and cpuinfo_cur_freq may not match. An example:
+
+scaling_cur_freq	: 1600000
+cpuinfo_cur_freq	: 1583000
+
+In this example, the nominal frequency is 2933 MHz. The driver obtains the
+current frequency, cpuinfo_cur_freq, as 54% of the nominal frequency:
+
+	54% of 2933 MHz = 1583 MHz
+
+Nominal frequency is the maximum frequency of the processor, and it usually
+corresponds to the frequency of the P0 P-state.
+
+2.4 related_cpus:
+-----------------
+The related_cpus field is identical to affected_cpus.
+
+affected_cpus	: 4
+related_cpus	: 4
+
+Currently, the PCC driver does not evaluate _PSD. The platforms that support
+PCC do not implement SW_ALL. So OSPM doesn't need to perform any coordination
+to ensure that the same frequency is requested of all dependent CPUs.
+
+3. Caveats:
+-----------
+The "cpufreq_stats" module in its present form cannot be loaded and
+expected to work with the PCC driver. Since the "cpufreq_stats" module
+provides information wrt each P-state, it is not applicable to the PCC driver.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 37872bb9efddf9518cc77c43f9fa8fc6bfd3d727 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
Date: Tue, 12 Jan 2010 12:52:43 +0900
Subject: ARM: SAMSUNG: Add script to change old clksrc_clk to new register
 defs

This script is used to change the old style clksrc_clk as originally
found in plat-s3c64xx to the new style. It is here for reference if needed
for future code merges.

Signed-off-by: Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
---
 .../arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk        | 167 +++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 167 insertions(+)
 create mode 100755 Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk
new file mode 100755
index 000000000000..0c50220851fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+#!/usr/bin/awk -f
+#
+# Copyright 2010 Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+#
+# Released under GPLv2
+
+# example usage
+# ./clksrc-change-registers.awk arch/arm/plat-s5pc1xx/include/plat/regs-clock.h < src > dst
+
+function extract_value(s)
+{
+    eqat = index(s, "=")
+    comat = index(s, ",")
+    return substr(s, eqat+2, (comat-eqat)-2)
+}
+
+function remove_brackets(b)
+{
+    return substr(b, 2, length(b)-2)
+}
+
+function splitdefine(l, p)
+{
+    r = split(l, tp)
+
+    p[0] = tp[2]
+    p[1] = remove_brackets(tp[3])
+}
+
+function find_length(f)
+{
+    if (0)
+	printf "find_length " f "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+
+    if (f ~ /0x1/)
+	return 1
+    else if (f ~ /0x3/)
+	return 2
+    else if (f ~ /0x7/)
+	return 3
+    else if (f ~ /0xf/)
+	return 4
+
+    printf "unknown legnth " f "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+    exit
+}
+
+function find_shift(s)
+{
+    id = index(s, "<")
+    if (id <= 0) {
+	printf "cannot find shift " s "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+	exit
+    }
+
+    return substr(s, id+2)
+}
+
+
+BEGIN {
+    if (ARGC < 2) {
+	print "too few arguments" > "/dev/stderr"
+	exit
+    }
+
+# read the header file and find the mask values that we will need
+# to replace and create an associative array of values
+
+    while (getline line < ARGV[1] > 0) {
+	if (line ~ /\#define.*_MASK/ &&
+	    !(line ~ /S5PC100_EPLL_MASK/) &&
+	    !(line ~ /USB_SIG_MASK/)) {
+	    splitdefine(line, fields)
+	    name = fields[0]
+	    if (0)
+		printf "MASK " line "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+	    dmask[name,0] = find_length(fields[1])
+	    dmask[name,1] = find_shift(fields[1])
+	    if (0)
+		printf "=> '" name "' LENGTH=" dmask[name,0] " SHIFT=" dmask[name,1] "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+	} else {
+	}
+    }
+
+    delete ARGV[1]
+}
+
+/clksrc_clk.*=.*{/ {
+    shift=""
+    mask=""
+    divshift=""
+    reg_div=""
+    reg_src=""
+    indent=1
+
+    print $0
+
+    for(; indent >= 1;) {
+	if ((getline line) <= 0) {
+	    printf "unexpected end of file" > "/dev/stderr"
+	    exit 1;
+	}
+
+	if (line ~ /\.shift/) {
+	    shift = extract_value(line)
+	} else if (line ~ /\.mask/) {
+	    mask = extract_value(line)
+	} else if (line ~ /\.reg_divider/) {
+	    reg_div = extract_value(line)
+	} else if (line ~ /\.reg_source/) {
+	    reg_src = extract_value(line)
+	} else if (line ~ /\.divider_shift/) {
+	    divshift = extract_value(line)
+	} else if (line ~ /{/) {
+		indent++
+		print line
+	    } else if (line ~ /}/) {
+	    indent--
+
+	    if (indent == 0) {
+		if (0) {
+		    printf "shift '" shift   "' ='" dmask[shift,0] "'\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+		    printf "mask  '" mask    "'\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+		    printf "dshft '" divshift "'\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+		    printf "rdiv  '" reg_div "'\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+		    printf "rsrc  '" reg_src "'\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+		}
+
+		generated = mask
+		sub(reg_src, reg_div, generated)
+
+		if (0) {
+		    printf "/* rsrc " reg_src " */\n"
+		    printf "/* rdiv " reg_div " */\n"
+		    printf "/* shift " shift " */\n"
+		    printf "/* mask " mask " */\n"
+		    printf "/* generated " generated " */\n"
+		}
+
+		if (reg_div != "") {
+		    printf "\t.reg_div = { "
+		    printf ".reg = " reg_div ", "
+		    printf ".shift = " dmask[generated,1] ", "
+		    printf ".size = " dmask[generated,0] ", "
+		    printf "},\n"
+		}
+
+		printf "\t.reg_src = { "
+		printf ".reg = " reg_src ", "
+		printf ".shift = " dmask[mask,1] ", "
+		printf ".size = " dmask[mask,0] ", "
+
+		printf "},\n"
+
+	    }
+
+	    print line
+	} else {
+	    print line
+	}
+
+	if (0)
+	    printf indent ":" line "\n" > "/dev/stderr"
+    }
+}
+
+// && ! /clksrc_clk.*=.*{/ { print $0 }
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a0c814afcfc2c840698372bd402b669b659ee1c5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
Date: Mon, 23 Nov 2009 23:32:31 +0000
Subject: ARM: SAMSUNG: Add initial documentation directory and overview

Start Documentation/arm/Samsung and add an initial overview file
which whilst is not complete, is better than nothing.

Signed-off-by: Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
---
 Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt | 86 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 86 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7cced1fea9c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+		Samsung ARM Linux Overview
+		==========================
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+  The Samsung range of ARM SoCs spans many similar devices, from the initial
+  ARM9 through to the newest ARM cores. This document shows an overview of
+  the current kernel support, how to use it and where to find the code
+  that supports this.
+
+  The currently supported SoCs are:
+
+  - S3C24XX: See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt for full list
+  - S3C64XX: S3C6400 and S3C6410
+  - S5PC6440
+
+  S5PC100 and S5PC110 support is currently being merged
+
+
+S3C24XX Systems
+---------------
+
+  There is still documentation in Documnetation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/ which
+  deals with the architecture and drivers specific to these devices.
+
+  See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt for more information
+  on the implementation details and specific support.
+
+
+Configuration
+-------------
+
+  A number of configurations are supplied, as there is no current way of
+  unifying all the SoCs into one kernel.
+
+  s5p6440_defconfig - S5P6440 specific default configuration
+  s5pc100_defconfig - S5PC100 specific default configuration
+
+
+Layout
+------
+
+  The directory layout is currently being restructured, and consists of
+  several platform directories and then the machine specific directories
+  of the CPUs being built for.
+
+  plat-samsung provides the base for all the implementations, and is the
+  last in the line of include directories that are processed for the build
+  specific information. It contains the base clock, GPIO and device definitions
+  to get the system running.
+
+  plat-s3c is the s3c24xx/s3c64xx platform directory, although it is currently
+  involved in other builds this will be phased out once the relevant code is
+  moved elsewhere.
+
+  plat-s3c24xx is for s3c24xx specific builds, see the S3C24XX docs.
+
+  plat-s3c64xx is for the s3c64xx specific bits, see the S3C24XX docs.
+
+  plat-s5p is for s5p specific builds, more to be added.
+
+
+  [ to finish ]
+
+
+Port Contributors
+-----------------
+
+  Ben Dooks (BJD)
+  Vincent Sanders
+  Herbert Potzl
+  Arnaud Patard (RTP)
+  Roc Wu
+  Klaus Fetscher
+  Dimitry Andric
+  Shannon Holland
+  Guillaume Gourat (NexVision)
+  Christer Weinigel (wingel) (Acer N30)
+  Lucas Correia Villa Real (S3C2400 port)
+
+
+Document Author
+---------------
+
+Copyright 2009-2010 Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 73834d6f90f6833663f9effd4cf9b79b63bc36e1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "J. Bruce Fields" <bfields@citi.umich.edu>
Date: Wed, 20 Jan 2010 17:17:04 -0500
Subject: nfsd: 4.1 has an rfc number

No need to refer to an internet draft; there's an RFC now.

Signed-off-by: J. Bruce Fields <bfields@citi.umich.edu>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt | 5 ++---
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
index 1bd0d0c05171..6a53a84afc72 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs41-server.txt
@@ -17,8 +17,7 @@ kernels must turn 4.1 on or off *before* turning support for version 4
 on or off; rpc.nfsd does this correctly.)
 
 The NFSv4 minorversion 1 (NFSv4.1) implementation in nfsd is based
-on the latest NFSv4.1 Internet Draft:
-http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-nfsv4-minorversion1-29
+on RFC 5661.
 
 From the many new features in NFSv4.1 the current implementation
 focuses on the mandatory-to-implement NFSv4.1 Sessions, providing
@@ -44,7 +43,7 @@ interoperability problems with future clients.  Known issues:
 	  trunking, but this is a mandatory feature, and its use is
 	  recommended to clients in a number of places.  (E.g. to ensure
 	  timely renewal in case an existing connection's retry timeouts
-	  have gotten too long; see section 8.3 of the draft.)
+	  have gotten too long; see section 8.3 of the RFC.)
 	  Therefore, lack of this feature may cause future clients to
 	  fail.
 	- Incomplete backchannel support: incomplete backchannel gss
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d3f620b2c4fecdc8e060b70e8d92d29fc01c6126 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ira Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
Date: Wed, 6 Jan 2010 13:34:04 +0000
Subject: fsldma: simplify IRQ probing and handling

The IRQ probing is needlessly complex. All off the 83xx device trees in
arch/powerpc/boot/dts/ specify 5 interrupts per DMA controller: one for the
controller, and one for each channel. These interrupts are all attached to
the same IRQ line.

This causes an interesting situation if two channels interrupt at the same
time. The per-controller handler will handle the first channel, and the
per-channel handler will handle the remaining channels.

Instead of this mess, we fix the bug in the per-controller handler, and
make it handle all channels that generated an interrupt. When a
per-controller handler is specified in the device tree, we prefer to use
the shared handler instead of the per-channel handler.

The 85xx/86xx controllers do not have a per-controller interrupt, and
instead use a per-channel interrupt. This behavior has not been changed.

Signed-off-by: Ira W. Snyder <iws@ovro.caltech.edu>
Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dan.j.williams@intel.com>
---
 Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt | 8 ++++++++
 1 file changed, 8 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
index 0732cdd05ba1..2a4b4bce6110 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/dma.txt
@@ -44,21 +44,29 @@ Example:
 			compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-dma-channel", "fsl,elo-dma-channel";
 			cell-index = <0>;
 			reg = <0 0x80>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
+			interrupts = <71 8>;
 		};
 		dma-channel@80 {
 			compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-dma-channel", "fsl,elo-dma-channel";
 			cell-index = <1>;
 			reg = <0x80 0x80>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
+			interrupts = <71 8>;
 		};
 		dma-channel@100 {
 			compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-dma-channel", "fsl,elo-dma-channel";
 			cell-index = <2>;
 			reg = <0x100 0x80>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
+			interrupts = <71 8>;
 		};
 		dma-channel@180 {
 			compatible = "fsl,mpc8349-dma-channel", "fsl,elo-dma-channel";
 			cell-index = <3>;
 			reg = <0x180 0x80>;
+			interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
+			interrupts = <71 8>;
 		};
 	};
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From fe9a2302230fa287715a11a3d3aec74eec75a6a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ali Gholami Rudi <ali@rudi.ir>
Date: Sun, 8 Nov 2009 19:29:23 +0330
Subject: doc: fix checking socket() in net tstamp example

Signed-off-by: Ali Gholami Rudi <ali@rudi.ir>
Acked-by: Patrick Ohly <patrick.ohly@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/networking/timestamping/timestamping.c | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/networking/timestamping/timestamping.c b/Documentation/networking/timestamping/timestamping.c
index a7936fe8444a..bab619a48214 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/timestamping/timestamping.c
+++ b/Documentation/networking/timestamping/timestamping.c
@@ -370,7 +370,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
 	}
 
 	sock = socket(PF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, IPPROTO_UDP);
-	if (socket < 0)
+	if (sock < 0)
 		bail("socket");
 
 	memset(&device, 0, sizeof(device));
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 947af2943576400628bba085eaa6b85143526133 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Stefan Weil <weil@mail.berlios.de>
Date: Thu, 7 Jan 2010 00:03:52 +0100
Subject: Fix spelling of 'platform' in comments and doc

Replace platfrom -> platform.

This is a frequent spelling bug.

Signed-off-by: Stefan Weil <weil@mail.berlios.de>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
index 2e2c2ea90ceb..41f41632ee55 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ command line. This will execute all matching early_param() callbacks.
 User specified early platform devices will be registered at this point.
 For the early serial console case the user can specify port on the
 kernel command line as "earlyprintk=serial.0" where "earlyprintk" is
-the class string, "serial" is the name of the platfrom driver and
+the class string, "serial" is the name of the platform driver and
 0 is the platform device id. If the id is -1 then the dot and the
 id can be omitted.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From de8164fb2242d77c8a83fb3c63830eb7914d696d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Sun, 17 Jan 2010 19:22:28 -0200
Subject: doc: fix leve -> level typo in pm-runtime doc

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index 356fd86f4ea8..8602e15212d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -250,7 +250,7 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       to suspend the device again in future
 
   int pm_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);
-    - execute the subsystem-leve resume callback for the device; returns 0 on
+    - execute the subsystem-level resume callback for the device; returns 0 on
       success, 1 if the device's run-time PM status was already 'active' or
       error code on failure, where -EAGAIN means it may be safe to attempt to
       resume the device again in future, but 'power.runtime_error' should be
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 19afd8e2ffd7a6e4026d51d63495e14d2a7bacc3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Sun, 17 Jan 2010 18:30:05 -0200
Subject: doc: update 00-INDEX for Documentation/laptops/

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX b/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
index ee5692b26dd4..df4fb52d4594 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
@@ -2,6 +2,10 @@
 	- This file
 acer-wmi.txt
 	- information on the Acer Laptop WMI Extras driver.
+asus-laptop.txt
+	- information on the Asus Laptop Extras driver.
+disk-shock-protection.txt
+	- information on hard disk shock protection.
 laptop-mode.txt
 	- how to conserve battery power using laptop-mode.
 sony-laptop.txt
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 3333e9ee9f8b82307f99fb8466724649da573025 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Sun, 17 Jan 2010 19:27:32 -0200
Subject: doc: fix Defaultd -> Defaults typo in EISA doc

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/eisa.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt
index 60e361ba08c0..f297fc1202ae 100644
--- a/Documentation/eisa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ device.
 virtual_root.force_probe :
 
 Force the probing code to probe EISA slots even when it cannot find an
-EISA compliant mainboard (nothing appears on slot 0). Defaultd to 0
+EISA compliant mainboard (nothing appears on slot 0). Defaults to 0
 (don't force), and set to 1 (force probing) when either
 CONFIG_ALPHA_JENSEN or CONFIG_EISA_VLB_PRIMING are set.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a64061e100826be758145462f8c656ba17c9541b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Sun, 17 Jan 2010 19:26:47 -0200
Subject: doc: capitalization and other minor fixes in pnp doc

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/pnp.txt | 13 ++++++-------
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/pnp.txt b/Documentation/pnp.txt
index a327db67782a..763e4659bf18 100644
--- a/Documentation/pnp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/pnp.txt
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ PC standard floppy disk controller
 # cat resources
 DISABLED
 
-- Notice the string "DISABLED".  THis means the device is not active.
+- Notice the string "DISABLED".  This means the device is not active.
 
 3.) check the device's possible configurations (optional)
 # cat options
@@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ Plug and Play but it is planned to be in the near future.
 
 Requirements for a Linux PnP protocol:
 1.) the protocol must use EISA IDs
-2.) the protocol must inform the PnP Layer of a devices current configuration
+2.) the protocol must inform the PnP Layer of a device's current configuration
 - the ability to set resources is optional but preferred.
 
 The following are PnP protocol related functions:
@@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ pnp_remove_device
 - automatically will free mem used by the device and related structures
 
 pnp_add_id
-- adds a EISA ID to the list of supported IDs for the specified device
+- adds an EISA ID to the list of supported IDs for the specified device
 
 For more information consult the source of a protocol such as
 /drivers/pnp/pnpbios/core.c.
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ For more information consult the source of a protocol such as
 
 Linux Plug and Play Drivers
 ---------------------------
-	This section contains information for linux PnP driver developers.
+	This section contains information for Linux PnP driver developers.
 
 The New Way
 ...........
@@ -235,11 +235,10 @@ static int __init serial8250_pnp_init(void)
 The Old Way
 ...........
 
-a series of compatibility functions have been created to make it easy to convert 
-
+A series of compatibility functions have been created to make it easy to convert
 ISAPNP drivers.  They should serve as a temporary solution only.
 
-they are as follows:
+They are as follows:
 
 struct pnp_card *pnp_find_card(unsigned short vendor,
 				 unsigned short device,
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 3ad2f3fbb961429d2aa627465ae4829758bc7e07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Daniel Mack <daniel@caiaq.de>
Date: Wed, 3 Feb 2010 08:01:28 +0800
Subject: tree-wide: Assorted spelling fixes

In particular, several occurances of funny versions of 'success',
'unknown', 'therefore', 'acknowledge', 'argument', 'achieve', 'address',
'beginning', 'desirable', 'separate' and 'necessary' are fixed.

Signed-off-by: Daniel Mack <daniel@caiaq.de>
Cc: Joe Perches <joe@perches.com>
Cc: Junio C Hamano <gitster@pobox.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl            |  6 +++---
 Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml          |  2 +-
 Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml   |  2 +-
 Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt |  4 ++--
 Documentation/hwmon/abituguru                 |  2 +-
 Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt        |  2 +-
 Documentation/networking/skfp.txt             |  2 +-
 Documentation/s390/kvm.txt                    |  2 +-
 Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc             | 10 +++++-----
 Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt                |  2 +-
 10 files changed, 17 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
index 5e7d84b48505..133cd6c3f3c1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl
@@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip)
 				The ECC bytes must be placed immidiately after the data
 				bytes in order to make the syndrome generator work. This
 				is contrary to the usual layout used by software ECC. The
-				seperation of data and out of band area is not longer
+				separation of data and out of band area is not longer
 				possible. The nand driver code handles this layout and
 				the remaining free bytes in the oob area are managed by 
 				the autoplacement code. Provide a matching oob-layout
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip)
 				bad blocks. They have factory marked good blocks. The marker pattern
 				is erased when the block is erased to be reused. So in case of
 				powerloss before writing the pattern back to the chip this block 
-				would be lost and added to the bad blocks. Therefor we scan the 
+				would be lost and added to the bad blocks. Therefore we scan the 
 				chip(s) when we detect them the first time for good blocks and 
 				store this information in a bad block table before erasing any 
 				of the blocks.
@@ -1094,7 +1094,7 @@ in this page</entry>
 		manufacturers specifications. This applies similar to the spare area. 
 	</para>
 	<para>
-		Therefor NAND aware filesystems must either write in page size chunks
+		Therefore NAND aware filesystems must either write in page size chunks
 		or hold a writebuffer to collect smaller writes until they sum up to 
 		pagesize. Available NAND aware filesystems: JFFS2, YAFFS. 		
 	</para>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml
index c65f0ac9b6ee..cea23e1c4fc6 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml
@@ -1170,7 +1170,7 @@ frames per second. If less than this number of frames is to be
 captured or output, applications can request frame skipping or
 duplicating on the driver side. This is especially useful when using
 the &func-read; or &func-write;, which are not augmented by timestamps
-or sequence counters, and to avoid unneccessary data copying.</para>
+or sequence counters, and to avoid unnecessary data copying.</para>
 
     <para>Finally these ioctls can be used to determine the number of
 buffers used internally by a driver in read/write mode. For
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
index 78332d365ce9..392aa9e5571e 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/vidioc-g-parm.xml
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ captured or output, applications can request frame skipping or
 duplicating on the driver side. This is especially useful when using
 the <function>read()</function> or <function>write()</function>, which
 are not augmented by timestamps or sequence counters, and to avoid
-unneccessary data copying.</para>
+unnecessary data copying.</para>
 
     <para>Further these ioctls can be used to determine the number of
 buffers used internally by a driver in read/write mode. For
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
index 76b3a11e90be..fa968aa99d67 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ Introduction
  how the clocks are arranged. The first implementation used as single
  PLL to feed the ARM, memory and peripherals via a series of dividers
  and muxes and this is the implementation that is documented here. A
- newer version where there is a seperate PLL and clock divider for the
- ARM core is available as a seperate driver.
+ newer version where there is a separate PLL and clock divider for the
+ ARM core is available as a separate driver.
 
 
 Layout
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru
index 87ffa0f5ec70..5eb3b9d5f0d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Supported chips:
 	   bank1_types=1,1,0,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,0,0,2,0,0,1
 	   You may also need to specify the fan_sensors option for these boards
 	   fan_sensors=5
-	2) There is a seperate abituguru3 driver for these motherboards,
+	2) There is a separate abituguru3 driver for these motherboards,
 	   the abituguru (without the 3 !) driver will not work on these
 	   motherboards (and visa versa)!
 
diff --git a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt
index 3a6aec40c0b0..8b4129de1d2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ and the number of steps or will clamp at the maximum and zero depending on
 the configuration.
 
 Because GPIO to IRQ mapping is platform specific, this information must
-be given in seperately to the driver. See the example below.
+be given in separately to the driver. See the example below.
 
 ---------<snip>---------
 
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt b/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt
index abfddf81e34a..203ec66c9fb4 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/skfp.txt
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Compaq adapters (not tested):
 =======================
 
 From v2.01 on, the driver is integrated in the linux kernel sources.
-Therefor, the installation is the same as for any other adapter
+Therefore, the installation is the same as for any other adapter
 supported by the kernel.
 Refer to the manual of your distribution about the installation
 of network adapters.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/kvm.txt b/Documentation/s390/kvm.txt
index 6f5ceb0f09fc..85f3280d7ef6 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/kvm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/kvm.txt
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ args:		unsigned long
 see also:	include/linux/kvm.h
 This ioctl stores the state of the cpu at the guest real address given as
 argument, unless one of the following values defined in include/linux/kvm.h
-is given as arguement:
+is given as argument:
 KVM_S390_STORE_STATUS_NOADDR - the CPU stores its status to the save area in
 absolute lowcore as defined by the principles of operation
 KVM_S390_STORE_STATUS_PREFIXED - the CPU stores its status to the save area in
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
index ff19a52fe004..2ffc1148eb95 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc
@@ -989,8 +989,8 @@ Changes from 20040709 to 20040716
 	* Remove redundant port_cmp != 2 check in if
 	  (!port_cmp) { .... if (port_cmp != 2).... }
 	* Clock changes: removed struct clk_data and timerList.
-	* Clock changes: seperate nodev_tmo and els_retry_delay into 2
-	  seperate timers and convert to 1 argument changed
+	* Clock changes: separate nodev_tmo and els_retry_delay into 2
+	  separate timers and convert to 1 argument changed
 	  LPFC_NODE_FARP_PEND_t to struct lpfc_node_farp_pend convert
 	  ipfarp_tmo to 1 argument convert target struct tmofunc and
 	  rtplunfunc to 1 argument * cr_count, cr_delay and
@@ -1514,7 +1514,7 @@ Changes from 20040402 to 20040409
 	* Remove unused elxclock declaration in elx_sli.h.
 	* Since everywhere IOCB_ENTRY is used, the return value is cast,
 	  move the cast into the macro.
-	* Split ioctls out into seperate files
+	* Split ioctls out into separate files
 
 Changes from 20040326 to 20040402
 
@@ -1534,7 +1534,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402
 	* Unused variable cleanup
 	* Use Linux list macros for DMABUF_t
 	* Break up ioctls into 3 sections, dfc, util, hbaapi
-	  rearranged code so this could be easily seperated into a
+	  rearranged code so this could be easily separated into a
 	  differnet module later All 3 are currently turned on by
 	  defines in lpfc_ioctl.c LPFC_DFC_IOCTL, LPFC_UTIL_IOCTL,
 	  LPFC_HBAAPI_IOCTL
@@ -1551,7 +1551,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402
 	  started by lpfc_online().  lpfc_offline() only stopped
 	  els_timeout routine.  It now stops all timeout routines
 	  associated with that hba.
-	* Replace seperate next and prev pointers in struct
+	* Replace separate next and prev pointers in struct
 	  lpfc_bindlist with list_head type.  In elxHBA_t, replace
 	  fc_nlpbind_start and _end with fc_nlpbind_list and use
 	  list_head macros to access it.
diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
index bab3040da548..03485bfbd797 100644
--- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
+++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.txt
@@ -1588,7 +1588,7 @@ module author does not need to worry about it.
 
 When tracing is enabled, kstop_machine is called to prevent
 races with the CPUS executing code being modified (which can
-cause the CPU to do undesireable things), and the nops are
+cause the CPU to do undesirable things), and the nops are
 patched back to calls. But this time, they do not call mcount
 (which is just a function stub). They now call into the ftrace
 infrastructure.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e902ec9906e844f4613fa6190c6fa65f162dc86e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jiro SEKIBA <jir@unicus.jp>
Date: Sat, 30 Jan 2010 18:06:35 +0900
Subject: nilfs2: issue discard request after cleaning segments

This adds a function to send discard requests for given array of
segment numbers, and calls the function when garbage collection
succeeded.

Signed-off-by: Jiro SEKIBA <jir@unicus.jp>
Signed-off-by: Ryusuke Konishi <konishi.ryusuke@lab.ntt.co.jp>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt | 3 +++
 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt
index 839efd8a8a8c..cf6d0d85ca82 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nilfs2.txt
@@ -74,6 +74,9 @@ norecovery		Disable recovery of the filesystem on mount.
 			This disables every write access on the device for
 			read-only mounts or snapshots.  This option will fail
 			for r/w mounts on an unclean volume.
+discard			Issue discard/TRIM commands to the underlying block
+			device when blocks are freed.  This is useful for SSD
+			devices and sparse/thinly-provisioned LUNs.
 
 NILFS2 usage
 ============
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From cb2992a60b7e73fbabe9ffe54056eed0022f2ed2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Mulyadi Santosa <mulyadi.santosa@gmail.com>
Date: Thu, 18 Feb 2010 01:22:40 +0700
Subject: doc: typo - Table 1-2 should refer to "status", not "statm"

Fixes a typo in proc.txt documentation. Table 1-2 should refer to
"status", not "statm"

Signed-off-by: Mulyadi Santosa <mulyadi.santosa@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 0d07513a67a6..bb314f60a76a 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ memory usage. Its seven fields are explained in Table 1-3.  The stat file
 contains details information about the process itself.  Its fields are
 explained in Table 1-4.
 
-Table 1-2: Contents of the statm files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
+Table 1-2: Contents of the status files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
 ..............................................................................
  Field                       Content
  Name                        filename of the executable
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 2b633e3fac5efada088b57d31e65401f22bcc18f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Yinghai Lu <yinghai@kernel.org>
Date: Wed, 10 Feb 2010 01:20:37 -0800
Subject: smp: Use nr_cpus= to set nr_cpu_ids early

On x86, before prefill_possible_map(), nr_cpu_ids will be NR_CPUS aka
CONFIG_NR_CPUS.

Add nr_cpus= to set nr_cpu_ids. so we can simulate cpus <=8 are installed on
normal config.

-v2: accordging to Christoph, acpi_numa_init should use nr_cpu_ids in stead of
     NR_CPUS.
-v3: add doc in kernel-parameters.txt according to Andrew.

Signed-off-by: Yinghai Lu <yinghai@kernel.org>
LKML-Reference: <1265793639-15071-34-git-send-email-yinghai@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com>
Cc: Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com>
---
 Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 736d45602886..51bceb0fb277 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -1772,6 +1772,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			purges which is reported from either PAL_VM_SUMMARY or
 			SAL PALO.
 
+	nr_cpus=	[SMP] Maximum number of processors that	an SMP kernel
+			could support.  nr_cpus=n : n >= 1 limits the kernel to
+			supporting 'n' processors. Later in runtime you can not
+			use hotplug cpu feature to put more cpu back to online.
+			just like you compile the kernel NR_CPUS=n
+
 	nr_uarts=	[SERIAL] maximum number of UARTs to be registered.
 
 	numa_zonelist_order= [KNL, BOOT] Select zonelist order for NUMA.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e21a05cb408bb9f244f11a0813d4b355dad0822e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: GeunSik Lim <leemgs1@gmail.com>
Date: Wed, 24 Feb 2010 11:06:39 +0100
Subject: doc: cpuset: Update the cpuset flag file

This patch is for modifying with correct cuset flag file.  We need to update
current manual for cpuset.  For example, before) cpus, cpu_exclusive, mems
after ) cpuset.cpus, cpuset.cpu_exclusive, cpuset.mems

Signed-off-by: Geunsik Lim <geunsik.lim@samsung.com>
Acked-by: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt | 127 +++++++++++++++++++-------------------
 1 file changed, 65 insertions(+), 62 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
index 1d7e9784439a..4160df82b3f5 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cpusets.txt
@@ -168,20 +168,20 @@ Each cpuset is represented by a directory in the cgroup file system
 containing (on top of the standard cgroup files) the following
 files describing that cpuset:
 
- - cpus: list of CPUs in that cpuset
- - mems: list of Memory Nodes in that cpuset
- - memory_migrate flag: if set, move pages to cpusets nodes
- - cpu_exclusive flag: is cpu placement exclusive?
- - mem_exclusive flag: is memory placement exclusive?
- - mem_hardwall flag:  is memory allocation hardwalled
- - memory_pressure: measure of how much paging pressure in cpuset
- - memory_spread_page flag: if set, spread page cache evenly on allowed nodes
- - memory_spread_slab flag: if set, spread slab cache evenly on allowed nodes
- - sched_load_balance flag: if set, load balance within CPUs on that cpuset
- - sched_relax_domain_level: the searching range when migrating tasks
+ - cpuset.cpus: list of CPUs in that cpuset
+ - cpuset.mems: list of Memory Nodes in that cpuset
+ - cpuset.memory_migrate flag: if set, move pages to cpusets nodes
+ - cpuset.cpu_exclusive flag: is cpu placement exclusive?
+ - cpuset.mem_exclusive flag: is memory placement exclusive?
+ - cpuset.mem_hardwall flag:  is memory allocation hardwalled
+ - cpuset.memory_pressure: measure of how much paging pressure in cpuset
+ - cpuset.memory_spread_page flag: if set, spread page cache evenly on allowed nodes
+ - cpuset.memory_spread_slab flag: if set, spread slab cache evenly on allowed nodes
+ - cpuset.sched_load_balance flag: if set, load balance within CPUs on that cpuset
+ - cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level: the searching range when migrating tasks
 
 In addition, the root cpuset only has the following file:
- - memory_pressure_enabled flag: compute memory_pressure?
+ - cpuset.memory_pressure_enabled flag: compute memory_pressure?
 
 New cpusets are created using the mkdir system call or shell
 command.  The properties of a cpuset, such as its flags, allowed
@@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ If a cpuset is cpu or mem exclusive, no other cpuset, other than
 a direct ancestor or descendant, may share any of the same CPUs or
 Memory Nodes.
 
-A cpuset that is mem_exclusive *or* mem_hardwall is "hardwalled",
+A cpuset that is cpuset.mem_exclusive *or* cpuset.mem_hardwall is "hardwalled",
 i.e. it restricts kernel allocations for page, buffer and other data
 commonly shared by the kernel across multiple users.  All cpusets,
 whether hardwalled or not, restrict allocations of memory for user
@@ -304,15 +304,15 @@ times 1000.
 ---------------------------
 There are two boolean flag files per cpuset that control where the
 kernel allocates pages for the file system buffers and related in
-kernel data structures.  They are called 'memory_spread_page' and
-'memory_spread_slab'.
+kernel data structures.  They are called 'cpuset.memory_spread_page' and
+'cpuset.memory_spread_slab'.
 
-If the per-cpuset boolean flag file 'memory_spread_page' is set, then
+If the per-cpuset boolean flag file 'cpuset.memory_spread_page' is set, then
 the kernel will spread the file system buffers (page cache) evenly
 over all the nodes that the faulting task is allowed to use, instead
 of preferring to put those pages on the node where the task is running.
 
-If the per-cpuset boolean flag file 'memory_spread_slab' is set,
+If the per-cpuset boolean flag file 'cpuset.memory_spread_slab' is set,
 then the kernel will spread some file system related slab caches,
 such as for inodes and dentries evenly over all the nodes that the
 faulting task is allowed to use, instead of preferring to put those
@@ -337,21 +337,21 @@ their containing tasks memory spread settings.  If memory spreading
 is turned off, then the currently specified NUMA mempolicy once again
 applies to memory page allocations.
 
-Both 'memory_spread_page' and 'memory_spread_slab' are boolean flag
+Both 'cpuset.memory_spread_page' and 'cpuset.memory_spread_slab' are boolean flag
 files.  By default they contain "0", meaning that the feature is off
 for that cpuset.  If a "1" is written to that file, then that turns
 the named feature on.
 
 The implementation is simple.
 
-Setting the flag 'memory_spread_page' turns on a per-process flag
+Setting the flag 'cpuset.memory_spread_page' turns on a per-process flag
 PF_SPREAD_PAGE for each task that is in that cpuset or subsequently
 joins that cpuset.  The page allocation calls for the page cache
 is modified to perform an inline check for this PF_SPREAD_PAGE task
 flag, and if set, a call to a new routine cpuset_mem_spread_node()
 returns the node to prefer for the allocation.
 
-Similarly, setting 'memory_spread_slab' turns on the flag
+Similarly, setting 'cpuset.memory_spread_slab' turns on the flag
 PF_SPREAD_SLAB, and appropriately marked slab caches will allocate
 pages from the node returned by cpuset_mem_spread_node().
 
@@ -404,24 +404,24 @@ the following two situations:
     system overhead on those CPUs, including avoiding task load
     balancing if that is not needed.
 
-When the per-cpuset flag "sched_load_balance" is enabled (the default
-setting), it requests that all the CPUs in that cpusets allowed 'cpus'
+When the per-cpuset flag "cpuset.sched_load_balance" is enabled (the default
+setting), it requests that all the CPUs in that cpusets allowed 'cpuset.cpus'
 be contained in a single sched domain, ensuring that load balancing
 can move a task (not otherwised pinned, as by sched_setaffinity)
 from any CPU in that cpuset to any other.
 
-When the per-cpuset flag "sched_load_balance" is disabled, then the
+When the per-cpuset flag "cpuset.sched_load_balance" is disabled, then the
 scheduler will avoid load balancing across the CPUs in that cpuset,
 --except-- in so far as is necessary because some overlapping cpuset
 has "sched_load_balance" enabled.
 
-So, for example, if the top cpuset has the flag "sched_load_balance"
+So, for example, if the top cpuset has the flag "cpuset.sched_load_balance"
 enabled, then the scheduler will have one sched domain covering all
-CPUs, and the setting of the "sched_load_balance" flag in any other
+CPUs, and the setting of the "cpuset.sched_load_balance" flag in any other
 cpusets won't matter, as we're already fully load balancing.
 
 Therefore in the above two situations, the top cpuset flag
-"sched_load_balance" should be disabled, and only some of the smaller,
+"cpuset.sched_load_balance" should be disabled, and only some of the smaller,
 child cpusets have this flag enabled.
 
 When doing this, you don't usually want to leave any unpinned tasks in
@@ -433,7 +433,7 @@ scheduler might not consider the possibility of load balancing that
 task to that underused CPU.
 
 Of course, tasks pinned to a particular CPU can be left in a cpuset
-that disables "sched_load_balance" as those tasks aren't going anywhere
+that disables "cpuset.sched_load_balance" as those tasks aren't going anywhere
 else anyway.
 
 There is an impedance mismatch here, between cpusets and sched domains.
@@ -443,19 +443,19 @@ overlap and each CPU is in at most one sched domain.
 It is necessary for sched domains to be flat because load balancing
 across partially overlapping sets of CPUs would risk unstable dynamics
 that would be beyond our understanding.  So if each of two partially
-overlapping cpusets enables the flag 'sched_load_balance', then we
+overlapping cpusets enables the flag 'cpuset.sched_load_balance', then we
 form a single sched domain that is a superset of both.  We won't move
 a task to a CPU outside it cpuset, but the scheduler load balancing
 code might waste some compute cycles considering that possibility.
 
 This mismatch is why there is not a simple one-to-one relation
-between which cpusets have the flag "sched_load_balance" enabled,
+between which cpusets have the flag "cpuset.sched_load_balance" enabled,
 and the sched domain configuration.  If a cpuset enables the flag, it
 will get balancing across all its CPUs, but if it disables the flag,
 it will only be assured of no load balancing if no other overlapping
 cpuset enables the flag.
 
-If two cpusets have partially overlapping 'cpus' allowed, and only
+If two cpusets have partially overlapping 'cpuset.cpus' allowed, and only
 one of them has this flag enabled, then the other may find its
 tasks only partially load balanced, just on the overlapping CPUs.
 This is just the general case of the top_cpuset example given a few
@@ -468,23 +468,23 @@ load balancing to the other CPUs.
 1.7.1 sched_load_balance implementation details.
 ------------------------------------------------
 
-The per-cpuset flag 'sched_load_balance' defaults to enabled (contrary
+The per-cpuset flag 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' defaults to enabled (contrary
 to most cpuset flags.)  When enabled for a cpuset, the kernel will
 ensure that it can load balance across all the CPUs in that cpuset
 (makes sure that all the CPUs in the cpus_allowed of that cpuset are
 in the same sched domain.)
 
-If two overlapping cpusets both have 'sched_load_balance' enabled,
+If two overlapping cpusets both have 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' enabled,
 then they will be (must be) both in the same sched domain.
 
-If, as is the default, the top cpuset has 'sched_load_balance' enabled,
+If, as is the default, the top cpuset has 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' enabled,
 then by the above that means there is a single sched domain covering
 the whole system, regardless of any other cpuset settings.
 
 The kernel commits to user space that it will avoid load balancing
 where it can.  It will pick as fine a granularity partition of sched
 domains as it can while still providing load balancing for any set
-of CPUs allowed to a cpuset having 'sched_load_balance' enabled.
+of CPUs allowed to a cpuset having 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' enabled.
 
 The internal kernel cpuset to scheduler interface passes from the
 cpuset code to the scheduler code a partition of the load balanced
@@ -495,9 +495,9 @@ all the CPUs that must be load balanced.
 The cpuset code builds a new such partition and passes it to the
 scheduler sched domain setup code, to have the sched domains rebuilt
 as necessary, whenever:
- - the 'sched_load_balance' flag of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs changes,
+ - the 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' flag of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs changes,
  - or CPUs come or go from a cpuset with this flag enabled,
- - or 'sched_relax_domain_level' value of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs
+ - or 'cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level' value of a cpuset with non-empty CPUs
    and with this flag enabled changes,
  - or a cpuset with non-empty CPUs and with this flag enabled is removed,
  - or a cpu is offlined/onlined.
@@ -542,7 +542,7 @@ As the result, task B on CPU X need to wait task A or wait load balance
 on the next tick.  For some applications in special situation, waiting
 1 tick may be too long.
 
-The 'sched_relax_domain_level' file allows you to request changing
+The 'cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level' file allows you to request changing
 this searching range as you like.  This file takes int value which
 indicates size of searching range in levels ideally as follows,
 otherwise initial value -1 that indicates the cpuset has no request.
@@ -559,8 +559,8 @@ The system default is architecture dependent.  The system default
 can be changed using the relax_domain_level= boot parameter.
 
 This file is per-cpuset and affect the sched domain where the cpuset
-belongs to.  Therefore if the flag 'sched_load_balance' of a cpuset
-is disabled, then 'sched_relax_domain_level' have no effect since
+belongs to.  Therefore if the flag 'cpuset.sched_load_balance' of a cpuset
+is disabled, then 'cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level' have no effect since
 there is no sched domain belonging the cpuset.
 
 If multiple cpusets are overlapping and hence they form a single sched
@@ -607,9 +607,9 @@ from one cpuset to another, then the kernel will adjust the tasks
 memory placement, as above, the next time that the kernel attempts
 to allocate a page of memory for that task.
 
-If a cpuset has its 'cpus' modified, then each task in that cpuset
+If a cpuset has its 'cpuset.cpus' modified, then each task in that cpuset
 will have its allowed CPU placement changed immediately.  Similarly,
-if a tasks pid is written to another cpusets 'tasks' file, then its
+if a tasks pid is written to another cpusets 'cpuset.tasks' file, then its
 allowed CPU placement is changed immediately.  If such a task had been
 bound to some subset of its cpuset using the sched_setaffinity() call,
 the task will be allowed to run on any CPU allowed in its new cpuset,
@@ -622,8 +622,8 @@ and the processor placement is updated immediately.
 Normally, once a page is allocated (given a physical page
 of main memory) then that page stays on whatever node it
 was allocated, so long as it remains allocated, even if the
-cpusets memory placement policy 'mems' subsequently changes.
-If the cpuset flag file 'memory_migrate' is set true, then when
+cpusets memory placement policy 'cpuset.mems' subsequently changes.
+If the cpuset flag file 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then when
 tasks are attached to that cpuset, any pages that task had
 allocated to it on nodes in its previous cpuset are migrated
 to the tasks new cpuset. The relative placement of the page within
@@ -631,12 +631,12 @@ the cpuset is preserved during these migration operations if possible.
 For example if the page was on the second valid node of the prior cpuset
 then the page will be placed on the second valid node of the new cpuset.
 
-Also if 'memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpusets
-'mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
-cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'mems',
+Also if 'cpuset.memory_migrate' is set true, then if that cpusets
+'cpuset.mems' file is modified, pages allocated to tasks in that
+cpuset, that were on nodes in the previous setting of 'cpuset.mems',
 will be moved to nodes in the new setting of 'mems.'
 Pages that were not in the tasks prior cpuset, or in the cpusets
-prior 'mems' setting, will not be moved.
+prior 'cpuset.mems' setting, will not be moved.
 
 There is an exception to the above.  If hotplug functionality is used
 to remove all the CPUs that are currently assigned to a cpuset,
@@ -678,8 +678,8 @@ and then start a subshell 'sh' in that cpuset:
   cd /dev/cpuset
   mkdir Charlie
   cd Charlie
-  /bin/echo 2-3 > cpus
-  /bin/echo 1 > mems
+  /bin/echo 2-3 > cpuset.cpus
+  /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.mems
   /bin/echo $$ > tasks
   sh
   # The subshell 'sh' is now running in cpuset Charlie
@@ -725,10 +725,13 @@ Now you want to do something with this cpuset.
 
 In this directory you can find several files:
 # ls
-cpu_exclusive  memory_migrate      mems                      tasks
-cpus           memory_pressure     notify_on_release
-mem_exclusive  memory_spread_page  sched_load_balance
-mem_hardwall   memory_spread_slab  sched_relax_domain_level
+cpuset.cpu_exclusive       cpuset.memory_spread_slab
+cpuset.cpus                cpuset.mems
+cpuset.mem_exclusive       cpuset.sched_load_balance
+cpuset.mem_hardwall        cpuset.sched_relax_domain_level
+cpuset.memory_migrate      notify_on_release
+cpuset.memory_pressure     tasks
+cpuset.memory_spread_page
 
 Reading them will give you information about the state of this cpuset:
 the CPUs and Memory Nodes it can use, the processes that are using
@@ -736,13 +739,13 @@ it, its properties.  By writing to these files you can manipulate
 the cpuset.
 
 Set some flags:
-# /bin/echo 1 > cpu_exclusive
+# /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive
 
 Add some cpus:
-# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpus
+# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.cpus
 
 Add some mems:
-# /bin/echo 0-7 > mems
+# /bin/echo 0-7 > cpuset.mems
 
 Now attach your shell to this cpuset:
 # /bin/echo $$ > tasks
@@ -774,28 +777,28 @@ echo "/sbin/cpuset_release_agent" > /dev/cpuset/release_agent
 This is the syntax to use when writing in the cpus or mems files
 in cpuset directories:
 
-# /bin/echo 1-4 > cpus		-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
-# /bin/echo 1,2,3,4 > cpus	-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
+# /bin/echo 1-4 > cpuset.cpus		-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
+# /bin/echo 1,2,3,4 > cpuset.cpus	-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4
 
 To add a CPU to a cpuset, write the new list of CPUs including the
 CPU to be added. To add 6 to the above cpuset:
 
-# /bin/echo 1-4,6 > cpus	-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4,6
+# /bin/echo 1-4,6 > cpuset.cpus	-> set cpus list to cpus 1,2,3,4,6
 
 Similarly to remove a CPU from a cpuset, write the new list of CPUs
 without the CPU to be removed.
 
 To remove all the CPUs:
 
-# /bin/echo "" > cpus		-> clear cpus list
+# /bin/echo "" > cpuset.cpus		-> clear cpus list
 
 2.3 Setting flags
 -----------------
 
 The syntax is very simple:
 
-# /bin/echo 1 > cpu_exclusive 	-> set flag 'cpu_exclusive'
-# /bin/echo 0 > cpu_exclusive 	-> unset flag 'cpu_exclusive'
+# /bin/echo 1 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive 	-> set flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
+# /bin/echo 0 > cpuset.cpu_exclusive 	-> unset flag 'cpuset.cpu_exclusive'
 
 2.4 Attaching processes
 -----------------------
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a8ab0102d7f031e477dbe31450d5b69d40bea324 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Date: Mon, 1 Feb 2010 15:57:15 -0200
Subject: doc: fix console doc typo

Signed-off-by: Thadeu Lima de Souza Cascardo <cascardo@holoscopio.com>
Signed-off-by: Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/console/console.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.txt
index 877a1b26cc3d..926cf1b5e63e 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.txt
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
 hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
 system driver.
 
-NOTE1: Binding and binding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
 
 Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
 console drivers
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From bb24c4716185f6e116c440462c65c1f56649183b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jacob Pan <jacob.jun.pan@intel.com>
Date: Wed, 2 Sep 2009 07:37:17 -0700
Subject: x86, apbt: Moorestown APB system timer driver

Moorestown platform does not have PIT or HPET platform timers.  Instead it
has a bank of eight APB timers.  The number of available timers to the os
is exposed via SFI mtmr tables.  All APB timer interrupts are routed via
ioapic rtes and delivered as MSI.
Currently, we use timer 0 and 1 for per cpu clockevent devices, timer 2
for clocksource.

Signed-off-by: Jacob Pan <jacob.jun.pan@intel.com>
LKML-Reference: <43F901BD926A4E43B106BF17856F0755A318D2D2@orsmsx508.amr.corp.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@zytor.com>
---
 Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 6 ++++++
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 51bceb0fb277..917220459e2a 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -2793,6 +2793,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			default x2apic cluster mode on platforms
 			supporting x2apic.
 
+	x86_mrst_timer= [X86-32,APBT]
+			Choose timer option for x86 Moorestown MID platform.
+			Two valid options are apbt timer only and lapic timer
+			plus one apbt timer for broadcast timer.
+			x86_mrst_timer=apbt_only | lapic_and_apbt
+
 	xd=		[HW,XT] Original XT pre-IDE (RLL encoded) disks.
 	xd_geo=		See header of drivers/block/xd.c.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b26486bf75148ab7b776c6a532a9bad33f987a38 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@redhat.com>
Date: Thu, 25 Feb 2010 08:35:04 -0500
Subject: kprobes: Add documents of jump optimization

Add documentations about kprobe jump optimization to
Documentation/kprobes.txt.

Changes in v10:
 - Editorial fixups by Jim Keniston.

Changes in v8:
 - Update documentation and benchmark results.

Signed-off-by: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Jim Keniston <jkenisto@us.ibm.com>
Cc: systemtap <systemtap@sources.redhat.com>
Cc: DLE <dle-develop@lists.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Ananth N Mavinakayanahalli <ananth@in.ibm.com>
Cc: Srikar Dronamraju <srikar@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Cc: Steven Rostedt <rostedt@goodmis.org>
Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com>
Cc: Anders Kaseorg <andersk@ksplice.com>
Cc: Tim Abbott <tabbott@ksplice.com>
Cc: Andi Kleen <andi@firstfloor.org>
Cc: Jason Baron <jbaron@redhat.com>
Cc: Mathieu Desnoyers <compudj@krystal.dyndns.org>
Cc: Frederic Weisbecker <fweisbec@gmail.com>
Cc: Ananth N Mavinakayanahalli <ananth@in.ibm.com>
LKML-Reference: <20100225133504.6725.79395.stgit@localhost6.localdomain6>
Signed-off-by: Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
---
 Documentation/kprobes.txt | 207 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++---
 1 file changed, 195 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kprobes.txt b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
index 053037a1fe6d..2f9115c0ae62 100644
--- a/Documentation/kprobes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kprobes.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
 Title	: Kernel Probes (Kprobes)
 Authors	: Jim Keniston <jkenisto@us.ibm.com>
-	: Prasanna S Panchamukhi <prasanna@in.ibm.com>
+	: Prasanna S Panchamukhi <prasanna.panchamukhi@gmail.com>
+	: Masami Hiramatsu <mhiramat@redhat.com>
 
 CONTENTS
 
@@ -15,6 +16,7 @@ CONTENTS
 9. Jprobes Example
 10. Kretprobes Example
 Appendix A: The kprobes debugfs interface
+Appendix B: The kprobes sysctl interface
 
 1. Concepts: Kprobes, Jprobes, Return Probes
 
@@ -42,13 +44,13 @@ registration/unregistration of a group of *probes. These functions
 can speed up unregistration process when you have to unregister
 a lot of probes at once.
 
-The next three subsections explain how the different types of
-probes work.  They explain certain things that you'll need to
-know in order to make the best use of Kprobes -- e.g., the
-difference between a pre_handler and a post_handler, and how
-to use the maxactive and nmissed fields of a kretprobe.  But
-if you're in a hurry to start using Kprobes, you can skip ahead
-to section 2.
+The next four subsections explain how the different types of
+probes work and how jump optimization works.  They explain certain
+things that you'll need to know in order to make the best use of
+Kprobes -- e.g., the difference between a pre_handler and
+a post_handler, and how to use the maxactive and nmissed fields of
+a kretprobe.  But if you're in a hurry to start using Kprobes, you
+can skip ahead to section 2.
 
 1.1 How Does a Kprobe Work?
 
@@ -161,13 +163,125 @@ In case probed function is entered but there is no kretprobe_instance
 object available, then in addition to incrementing the nmissed count,
 the user entry_handler invocation is also skipped.
 
+1.4 How Does Jump Optimization Work?
+
+If you configured your kernel with CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y (currently
+this option is supported on x86/x86-64, non-preemptive kernel) and
+the "debug.kprobes_optimization" kernel parameter is set to 1 (see
+sysctl(8)), Kprobes tries to reduce probe-hit overhead by using a jump
+instruction instead of a breakpoint instruction at each probepoint.
+
+1.4.1 Init a Kprobe
+
+When a probe is registered, before attempting this optimization,
+Kprobes inserts an ordinary, breakpoint-based kprobe at the specified
+address. So, even if it's not possible to optimize this particular
+probepoint, there'll be a probe there.
+
+1.4.2 Safety Check
+
+Before optimizing a probe, Kprobes performs the following safety checks:
+
+- Kprobes verifies that the region that will be replaced by the jump
+instruction (the "optimized region") lies entirely within one function.
+(A jump instruction is multiple bytes, and so may overlay multiple
+instructions.)
+
+- Kprobes analyzes the entire function and verifies that there is no
+jump into the optimized region.  Specifically:
+  - the function contains no indirect jump;
+  - the function contains no instruction that causes an exception (since
+  the fixup code triggered by the exception could jump back into the
+  optimized region -- Kprobes checks the exception tables to verify this);
+  and
+  - there is no near jump to the optimized region (other than to the first
+  byte).
+
+- For each instruction in the optimized region, Kprobes verifies that
+the instruction can be executed out of line.
+
+1.4.3 Preparing Detour Buffer
+
+Next, Kprobes prepares a "detour" buffer, which contains the following
+instruction sequence:
+- code to push the CPU's registers (emulating a breakpoint trap)
+- a call to the trampoline code which calls user's probe handlers.
+- code to restore registers
+- the instructions from the optimized region
+- a jump back to the original execution path.
+
+1.4.4 Pre-optimization
+
+After preparing the detour buffer, Kprobes verifies that none of the
+following situations exist:
+- The probe has either a break_handler (i.e., it's a jprobe) or a
+post_handler.
+- Other instructions in the optimized region are probed.
+- The probe is disabled.
+In any of the above cases, Kprobes won't start optimizing the probe.
+Since these are temporary situations, Kprobes tries to start
+optimizing it again if the situation is changed.
+
+If the kprobe can be optimized, Kprobes enqueues the kprobe to an
+optimizing list, and kicks the kprobe-optimizer workqueue to optimize
+it.  If the to-be-optimized probepoint is hit before being optimized,
+Kprobes returns control to the original instruction path by setting
+the CPU's instruction pointer to the copied code in the detour buffer
+-- thus at least avoiding the single-step.
+
+1.4.5 Optimization
+
+The Kprobe-optimizer doesn't insert the jump instruction immediately;
+rather, it calls synchronize_sched() for safety first, because it's
+possible for a CPU to be interrupted in the middle of executing the
+optimized region(*).  As you know, synchronize_sched() can ensure
+that all interruptions that were active when synchronize_sched()
+was called are done, but only if CONFIG_PREEMPT=n.  So, this version
+of kprobe optimization supports only kernels with CONFIG_PREEMPT=n.(**)
+
+After that, the Kprobe-optimizer calls stop_machine() to replace
+the optimized region with a jump instruction to the detour buffer,
+using text_poke_smp().
+
+1.4.6 Unoptimization
+
+When an optimized kprobe is unregistered, disabled, or blocked by
+another kprobe, it will be unoptimized.  If this happens before
+the optimization is complete, the kprobe is just dequeued from the
+optimized list.  If the optimization has been done, the jump is
+replaced with the original code (except for an int3 breakpoint in
+the first byte) by using text_poke_smp().
+
+(*)Please imagine that the 2nd instruction is interrupted and then
+the optimizer replaces the 2nd instruction with the jump *address*
+while the interrupt handler is running. When the interrupt
+returns to original address, there is no valid instruction,
+and it causes an unexpected result.
+
+(**)This optimization-safety checking may be replaced with the
+stop-machine method that ksplice uses for supporting a CONFIG_PREEMPT=y
+kernel.
+
+NOTE for geeks:
+The jump optimization changes the kprobe's pre_handler behavior.
+Without optimization, the pre_handler can change the kernel's execution
+path by changing regs->ip and returning 1.  However, when the probe
+is optimized, that modification is ignored.  Thus, if you want to
+tweak the kernel's execution path, you need to suppress optimization,
+using one of the following techniques:
+- Specify an empty function for the kprobe's post_handler or break_handler.
+ or
+- Config CONFIG_OPTPROBES=n.
+ or
+- Execute 'sysctl -w debug.kprobes_optimization=n'
+
 2. Architectures Supported
 
 Kprobes, jprobes, and return probes are implemented on the following
 architectures:
 
-- i386
-- x86_64 (AMD-64, EM64T)
+- i386 (Supports jump optimization)
+- x86_64 (AMD-64, EM64T) (Supports jump optimization)
 - ppc64
 - ia64 (Does not support probes on instruction slot1.)
 - sparc64 (Return probes not yet implemented.)
@@ -193,6 +307,10 @@ it useful to "Compile the kernel with debug info" (CONFIG_DEBUG_INFO),
 so you can use "objdump -d -l vmlinux" to see the source-to-object
 code mapping.
 
+If you want to reduce probing overhead, set "Kprobes jump optimization
+support" (CONFIG_OPTPROBES) to "y". You can find this option under the
+"Kprobes" line.
+
 4. API Reference
 
 The Kprobes API includes a "register" function and an "unregister"
@@ -389,7 +507,10 @@ the probe which has been registered.
 
 Kprobes allows multiple probes at the same address.  Currently,
 however, there cannot be multiple jprobes on the same function at
-the same time.
+the same time.  Also, a probepoint for which there is a jprobe or
+a post_handler cannot be optimized.  So if you install a jprobe,
+or a kprobe with a post_handler, at an optimized probepoint, the
+probepoint will be unoptimized automatically.
 
 In general, you can install a probe anywhere in the kernel.
 In particular, you can probe interrupt handlers.  Known exceptions
@@ -453,6 +574,38 @@ reason, Kprobes doesn't support return probes (or kprobes or jprobes)
 on the x86_64 version of __switch_to(); the registration functions
 return -EINVAL.
 
+On x86/x86-64, since the Jump Optimization of Kprobes modifies
+instructions widely, there are some limitations to optimization. To
+explain it, we introduce some terminology. Imagine a 3-instruction
+sequence consisting of a two 2-byte instructions and one 3-byte
+instruction.
+
+        IA
+         |
+[-2][-1][0][1][2][3][4][5][6][7]
+        [ins1][ins2][  ins3 ]
+	[<-     DCR       ->]
+	   [<- JTPR ->]
+
+ins1: 1st Instruction
+ins2: 2nd Instruction
+ins3: 3rd Instruction
+IA:  Insertion Address
+JTPR: Jump Target Prohibition Region
+DCR: Detoured Code Region
+
+The instructions in DCR are copied to the out-of-line buffer
+of the kprobe, because the bytes in DCR are replaced by
+a 5-byte jump instruction. So there are several limitations.
+
+a) The instructions in DCR must be relocatable.
+b) The instructions in DCR must not include a call instruction.
+c) JTPR must not be targeted by any jump or call instruction.
+d) DCR must not straddle the border betweeen functions.
+
+Anyway, these limitations are checked by the in-kernel instruction
+decoder, so you don't need to worry about that.
+
 6. Probe Overhead
 
 On a typical CPU in use in 2005, a kprobe hit takes 0.5 to 1.0
@@ -476,6 +629,19 @@ k = 0.49 usec; j = 0.76; r = 0.80; kr = 0.82; jr = 1.07
 ppc64: POWER5 (gr), 1656 MHz (SMT disabled, 1 virtual CPU per physical CPU)
 k = 0.77 usec; j = 1.31; r = 1.26; kr = 1.45; jr = 1.99
 
+6.1 Optimized Probe Overhead
+
+Typically, an optimized kprobe hit takes 0.07 to 0.1 microseconds to
+process. Here are sample overhead figures (in usec) for x86 architectures.
+k = unoptimized kprobe, b = boosted (single-step skipped), o = optimized kprobe,
+r = unoptimized kretprobe, rb = boosted kretprobe, ro = optimized kretprobe.
+
+i386: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
+k = 0.80 usec; b = 0.33; o = 0.05; r = 1.10; rb = 0.61; ro = 0.33
+
+x86-64: Intel(R) Xeon(R) E5410, 2.33GHz, 4656.90 bogomips
+k = 0.99 usec; b = 0.43; o = 0.06; r = 1.24; rb = 0.68; ro = 0.30
+
 7. TODO
 
 a. SystemTap (http://sourceware.org/systemtap): Provides a simplified
@@ -523,7 +689,8 @@ is also specified. Following columns show probe status. If the probe is on
 a virtual address that is no longer valid (module init sections, module
 virtual addresses that correspond to modules that've been unloaded),
 such probes are marked with [GONE]. If the probe is temporarily disabled,
-such probes are marked with [DISABLED].
+such probes are marked with [DISABLED]. If the probe is optimized, it is
+marked with [OPTIMIZED].
 
 /sys/kernel/debug/kprobes/enabled: Turn kprobes ON/OFF forcibly.
 
@@ -533,3 +700,19 @@ registered probes will be disarmed, till such time a "1" is echoed to this
 file. Note that this knob just disarms and arms all kprobes and doesn't
 change each probe's disabling state. This means that disabled kprobes (marked
 [DISABLED]) will be not enabled if you turn ON all kprobes by this knob.
+
+
+Appendix B: The kprobes sysctl interface
+
+/proc/sys/debug/kprobes-optimization: Turn kprobes optimization ON/OFF.
+
+When CONFIG_OPTPROBES=y, this sysctl interface appears and it provides
+a knob to globally and forcibly turn jump optimization (see section
+1.4) ON or OFF. By default, jump optimization is allowed (ON).
+If you echo "0" to this file or set "debug.kprobes_optimization" to
+0 via sysctl, all optimized probes will be unoptimized, and any new
+probes registered after that will not be optimized.  Note that this
+knob *changes* the optimized state. This means that optimized probes
+(marked [OPTIMIZED]) will be unoptimized ([OPTIMIZED] tag will be
+removed). If the knob is turned on, they will be optimized again.
+
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b525c06cdbd8a3963f0173ccd23f9147d4c384b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
Date: Thu, 25 Feb 2010 22:22:22 -0300
Subject: thinkpad-acpi: lock down video output state access

Given the right combination of ThinkPad and X.org, just reading the
video output control state is enough to hard-crash X.org.

Until the day I somehow find out a model or BIOS cut date to not
provide this feature to ThinkPads that can do video switching through
X RandR, change permissions so that only processes with CAP_SYS_ADMIN
can access any sort of video output control state.

This bug could be considered a local DoS I suppose, as it allows any
non-privledged local user to cause some versions of X.org to
hard-crash some ThinkPads.

Reported-by: Jidanni <jidanni@jidanni.org>
Signed-off-by: Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
Cc: stable@kernel.org
---
 Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 75afa1229fd7..39c0a09d0105 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -650,6 +650,10 @@ LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
 	echo expand_toggle > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
 	echo video_switch > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
 
+NOTE: Access to this feature is restricted to processes owning the
+CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability for safety reasons, as it can interact badly
+enough with some versions of X.org to crash it.
+
 Each video output device can be enabled or disabled individually.
 Reading /proc/acpi/ibm/video shows the status of each device.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 4c13dd3b48fcb6fbe44f241eb11a057ecd1cba75 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dmitry Monakhov <dmonakhov@openvz.org>
Date: Fri, 26 Feb 2010 09:36:12 +0300
Subject: failslab: add ability to filter slab caches

This patch allow to inject faults only for specific slabs.
In order to preserve default behavior cache filter is off by
default (all caches are faulty).

One may define specific set of slabs like this:
# mark skbuff_head_cache as faulty
echo 1 > /sys/kernel/slab/skbuff_head_cache/failslab
# Turn on cache filter (off by default)
echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/failslab/cache-filter
# Turn on fault injection
echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/failslab/times
echo 1 > /sys/kernel/debug/failslab/probability

Acked-by: David Rientjes <rientjes@google.com>
Acked-by: Akinobu Mita <akinobu.mita@gmail.com>
Acked-by: Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Monakhov <dmonakhov@openvz.org>
Signed-off-by: Pekka Enberg <penberg@cs.helsinki.fi>
---
 Documentation/vm/slub.txt | 1 +
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
index b37300edf27c..07375e73981a 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/slub.txt
@@ -41,6 +41,7 @@ Possible debug options are
 	P		Poisoning (object and padding)
 	U		User tracking (free and alloc)
 	T		Trace (please only use on single slabs)
+	A		Toggle failslab filter mark for the cache
 	O		Switch debugging off for caches that would have
 			caused higher minimum slab orders
 	-		Switch all debugging off (useful if the kernel is
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 409a415fa18f3bdb9bef616ac6abafd30a4f1415 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
Date: Sun, 10 Jan 2010 20:57:15 +0100
Subject: eeepc-laptop: set the right paths in the documentation

Signed-off-by: Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
---
 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-laptop | 10 +++++-----
 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-laptop
index 7445dfb321b5..5b026c69587a 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-laptop
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc-laptop/disp
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc/disp
 Date:		May 2008
 KernelVersion:	2.6.26
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -9,21 +9,21 @@ Description:
 		- 3 = LCD+CRT
 		If you run X11, you should use xrandr instead.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc-laptop/camera
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc/camera
 Date:		May 2008
 KernelVersion:	2.6.26
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
 Description:
 		Control the camera. 1 means on, 0 means off.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc-laptop/cardr
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc/cardr
 Date:		May 2008
 KernelVersion:	2.6.26
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
 Description:
 		Control the card reader. 1 means on, 0 means off.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc-laptop/cpufv
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc/cpufv
 Date:		Jun 2009
 KernelVersion:	2.6.31
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Description:
 		    `------------ Availables modes
 		For example, 0x301 means: mode 1 selected, 3 available modes.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc-laptop/available_cpufv
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/eeepc/available_cpufv
 Date:		Jun 2009
 KernelVersion:	2.6.31
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From c45eecf8719e0b2090c8a71bdc31e39d00746c84 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
Date: Sun, 10 Jan 2010 20:56:23 +0100
Subject: asus-laptop: set the right paths in the documentation

Signed-off-by: Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
---
 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop | 12 ++++++------
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
index a1cb660c50cf..1d775390e856 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/display
 Date:		January 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.20
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Description:
 		Ex: - 0 (0000b) means no display
 		    - 3 (0011b) CRT+LCD.
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/gps
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/gps
 Date:		January 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.20
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Description:
 		Control the gps device. 1 means on, 0 means off.
 Users:		Lapsus
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/ledd
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/ledd
 Date:		January 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.20
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ Description:
 		Some models like the W1N have a LED display that can be
 		used to display several informations.
 		To control the LED display, use the following :
-		    echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/
+		    echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/
 		where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display.
 		The DDD table can be found in Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/bluetooth
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/bluetooth
 Date:		January 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.20
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Description:
 		This may control the led, the device or both.
 Users:		Lapsus
 
-What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/wlan
+What:		/sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/wlan
 Date:		January 2007
 KernelVersion:	2.6.20
 Contact:	"Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 2044892d4a005a78796c92fd1aef4633be896698 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Wu Fengguang <fengguang.wu@intel.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Dec 2009 09:04:16 +0800
Subject: KVM: trivial document fixes

Signed-off-by: Wu Fengguang <fengguang.wu@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Marcelo Tosatti <mtosatti@redhat.com>
---
 Documentation/kvm/api.txt | 12 ++++++------
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
index 2811e452f756..c6416a398163 100644
--- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kvm/api.txt
@@ -23,12 +23,12 @@ of a virtual machine.  The ioctls belong to three classes
    Only run vcpu ioctls from the same thread that was used to create the
    vcpu.
 
-2. File descritpors
+2. File descriptors
 
 The kvm API is centered around file descriptors.  An initial
 open("/dev/kvm") obtains a handle to the kvm subsystem; this handle
 can be used to issue system ioctls.  A KVM_CREATE_VM ioctl on this
-handle will create a VM file descripror which can be used to issue VM
+handle will create a VM file descriptor which can be used to issue VM
 ioctls.  A KVM_CREATE_VCPU ioctl on a VM fd will create a virtual cpu
 and return a file descriptor pointing to it.  Finally, ioctls on a vcpu
 fd can be used to control the vcpu, including the important task of
@@ -643,7 +643,7 @@ Type: vm ioctl
 Parameters: struct kvm_clock_data (in)
 Returns: 0 on success, -1 on error
 
-Sets the current timestamp of kvmclock to the valued specific in its parameter.
+Sets the current timestamp of kvmclock to the value specified in its parameter.
 In conjunction with KVM_GET_CLOCK, it is used to ensure monotonicity on scenarios
 such as migration.
 
@@ -795,11 +795,11 @@ Unused.
 			__u64 data_offset; /* relative to kvm_run start */
 		} io;
 
-If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_IO_IN or KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT, then the vcpu has
+If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_IO, then the vcpu has
 executed a port I/O instruction which could not be satisfied by kvm.
 data_offset describes where the data is located (KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT) or
 where kvm expects application code to place the data for the next
-KVM_RUN invocation (KVM_EXIT_IO_IN).  Data format is a patcked array.
+KVM_RUN invocation (KVM_EXIT_IO_IN).  Data format is a packed array.
 
 		struct {
 			struct kvm_debug_exit_arch arch;
@@ -815,7 +815,7 @@ Unused.
 			__u8  is_write;
 		} mmio;
 
-If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_MMIO or KVM_EXIT_IO_OUT, then the vcpu has
+If exit_reason is KVM_EXIT_MMIO, then the vcpu has
 executed a memory-mapped I/O instruction which could not be satisfied
 by kvm.  The 'data' member contains the written data if 'is_write' is
 true, and should be filled by application code otherwise.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From db358796d95886f9715d1c91e9ae866c005511d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
Date: Tue, 26 Jan 2010 16:30:06 +0200
Subject: KVM: Plan obsolescence of kernel allocated slots, paravirt mmu

These features are unused by modern userspace and can go away.  Paravirt
mmu needs to stay a little longer for live migration.

Signed-off-by: Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
---
 Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 30 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 30 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index ea401495528d..db205276bb53 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -538,3 +538,33 @@ Why:	Duplicate functionality with the gspca_zc3xx driver, zc0301 only
 	sensors) wich are also supported by the gspca_zc3xx driver
 	(which supports 53 USB-ID's in total)
 Who:	Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	KVM memory aliases support
+When:	July 2010
+Why:	Memory aliasing support is used for speeding up guest vga access
+	through the vga windows.
+
+	Modern userspace no longer uses this feature, so it's just bitrotted
+	code and can be removed with no impact.
+Who:	Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	KVM kernel-allocated memory slots
+When:	July 2010
+Why:	Since 2.6.25, kvm supports user-allocated memory slots, which are
+	much more flexible than kernel-allocated slots.  All current userspace
+	supports the newer interface and this code can be removed with no
+	impact.
+Who:	Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
+
+----------------------------
+
+What:	KVM paravirt mmu host support
+When:	January 2011
+Why:	The paravirt mmu host support is slower than non-paravirt mmu, both
+	on newer and older hardware.  It is already not exposed to the guest,
+	and kept only for live migration purposes.
+Who:	Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e584bc3cf6865e005bbb4dbabae0bf4b3df59500 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Clemens Ladisch <clemens@ladisch.de>
Date: Mon, 1 Mar 2010 16:20:37 +0100
Subject: ALSA: ua101: add Edirol UA-1000 support

Add support for the Edirol UA-1000 to the UA-101 driver.

Both devices behave the same, so we just have to shuffle around some
interface numbers and name strings.

Signed-off-by: Clemens Ladisch <clemens@ladisch.de>
Signed-off-by: Jaroslav Kysela <perex@perex.cz>
---
 Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
index 33df82e3a398..bfcbbf88c44d 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt
@@ -1812,7 +1812,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed.
   Module snd-ua101
   ----------------
 
-    Module for the Edirol UA-101 audio/MIDI interface.
+    Module for the Edirol UA-101/UA-1000 audio/MIDI interfaces.
 
     This module supports multiple devices, autoprobe and hotplugging.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 393764340beb595c1ad7dd2d2243c2b6551aaa71 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Seth Heasley <seth.heasley@intel.com>
Date: Tue, 2 Mar 2010 12:23:39 +0100
Subject: i2c-i801: Add Intel Cougar Point device IDs

Add the Intel Cougar Point (PCH) SMBus controller device IDs.

Signed-off-by: Seth Heasley <seth.heasley@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 | 3 ++-
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801 b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
index 81c0c59a60ea..e1bb5b261693 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-i801
@@ -15,7 +15,8 @@ Supported adapters:
   * Intel 82801I (ICH9)
   * Intel EP80579 (Tolapai)
   * Intel 82801JI (ICH10)
-  * Intel PCH
+  * Intel 3400/5 Series (PCH)
+  * Intel Cougar Point (PCH)
    Datasheets: Publicly available at the Intel website
 
 Authors: 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b5527a7766f0505dc72efe3cefe5e9dea826f611 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Tue, 2 Mar 2010 12:23:42 +0100
Subject: i2c: Add SMBus alert support

SMBus alert support. The SMBus alert protocol allows several SMBus
slave devices to share a single interrupt pin on the SMBus master,
while still allowing the master to know which slave triggered the
interrupt.

This is based on preliminary work by David Brownell. The key
difference between David's implementation and mine is that his was
part of i2c-core, while mine is split into a separate, standalone
module named i2c-smbus. The i2c-smbus module is meant to include
support for all SMBus extensions to the I2C protocol in the future.

The benefit of this approach is a zero cost for I2C bus segments which
do not need SMBus alert support. Where David's implementation
increased the size of struct i2c_adapter by 7% (40 bytes on i386),
mine doesn't touch it. Where David's implementation added over 150
lines of code to i2c-core (+10%), mine doesn't touch it. The only
change that touches all the users of the i2c subsystem is a new
callback in struct i2c_driver (common to both implementations.) I seem
to remember Trent was worried about the footprint of David'd
implementation, hopefully mine addresses the issue.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Acked-by: Jonathan Cameron <jic23@cam.ac.uk>
Cc: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Trent Piepho <tpiepho@freescale.com>
---
 Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol | 16 ++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 16 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
index 9df47441f0e7..7c19d1a2bea0 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/smbus-protocol
@@ -185,6 +185,22 @@ the protocol. All ARP communications use slave address 0x61 and
 require PEC checksums.
 
 
+SMBus Alert
+===========
+
+SMBus Alert was introduced in Revision 1.0 of the specification.
+
+The SMBus alert protocol allows several SMBus slave devices to share a
+single interrupt pin on the SMBus master, while still allowing the master
+to know which slave triggered the interrupt.
+
+This is implemented the following way in the Linux kernel:
+* I2C bus drivers which support SMBus alert should call
+  i2c_setup_smbus_alert() to setup SMBus alert support.
+* I2C drivers for devices which can trigger SMBus alerts should implement
+  the optional alert() callback.
+
+
 I2C Block Transactions
 ======================
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 35859254483bce479024781885bc02d860552995 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Tue, 2 Mar 2010 12:23:44 +0100
Subject: i2c-parport: Add SMBus alert support

Add support for the SMBus alert mechanism to the i2c-parport driver.
The ADM1032 evaluation board at least is properly wired for this.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Cc: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Trent Piepho <tpiepho@freescale.com>
---
 Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport | 3 +++
 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport
index dceaba1ad930..2461c7b53b2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport
@@ -29,6 +29,9 @@ can be easily added when needed.
 Earlier kernels defaulted to type=0 (Philips).  But now, if the type
 parameter is missing, the driver will simply fail to initialize.
 
+SMBus alert support is available on adapters which have this line properly
+connected to the parallel port's interrupt pin.
+
 
 Building your own adapter
 -------------------------
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 927ab2f80745ec26f1e83e6ca15a5b29e134c8e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Tue, 2 Mar 2010 12:23:45 +0100
Subject: i2c-parport-light: Add SMBus alert support

Add support for the SMBus alert mechanism to the i2c-parport-light
driver. The ADM1032 evaluation board at least is properly wired for
this.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Cc: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Trent Piepho <tpiepho@freescale.com>
---
 Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light | 11 +++++++++++
 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light
index 287436478520..bdc9cbb2e0f2 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light
@@ -9,3 +9,14 @@ parport handling is not an option. The drawback is a reduced portability
 and the impossibility to daisy-chain other parallel port devices.                 
   
 Please see i2c-parport for documentation.
+
+Module parameters:
+
+* type: type of adapter (see i2c-parport or modinfo)
+
+* base: base I/O address
+  Default is 0x378 which is fairly common for parallel ports, at least on PC.
+
+* irq: optional IRQ
+  This must be passed if you want SMBus alert support, assuming your adapter
+  actually supports this.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0c43ea544c1086fbbed5a6c99ea58eb64674ea8f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Zhangfei Gao <zgao6@marvell.com>
Date: Tue, 2 Mar 2010 12:23:49 +0100
Subject: i2c: Document the message size limit

i2c_master_send & i2c_master_recv do not support more than 64 kb
transfer, since msg.len is u16.

Signed-off-by: Zhangfei Gao <zgao6@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/i2c/writing-clients | 5 +++--
 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
index 0a74603eb671..3219ee0dbfef 100644
--- a/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
+++ b/Documentation/i2c/writing-clients
@@ -318,8 +318,9 @@ Plain I2C communication
 These routines read and write some bytes from/to a client. The client
 contains the i2c address, so you do not have to include it. The second
 parameter contains the bytes to read/write, the third the number of bytes
-to read/write (must be less than the length of the buffer.) Returned is
-the actual number of bytes read/written.
+to read/write (must be less than the length of the buffer, also should be
+less than 64k since msg.len is u16.) Returned is the actual number of bytes
+read/written.
 
 	int i2c_transfer(struct i2c_adapter *adap, struct i2c_msg *msg,
 			 int num);
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1bfbd283cd3082b6cadfbf340faf7d35b8a36b83 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Date: Sat, 21 Nov 2009 15:03:23 +0000
Subject: USB: cxacru: return an empty value for modulation if there is no
 connection

When there is no connection, return an empty string
instead of "0" for the connection modulation.

Signed-off-by: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt | 1 +
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
index b074681a963e..3532ceecd2c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
@@ -61,6 +61,7 @@ several sysfs attribute files for retrieving device statistics:
 * mac_address
 
 * modulation
+	"" (when not connected)
 	"ANSI T1.413"
 	"ITU-T G.992.1 (G.DMT)"
 	"ITU-T G.992.2 (G.LITE)"
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 4ac37208e9b30b36b615ed22a79b4ee787fdc9b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Date: Sat, 21 Nov 2009 15:14:01 +0000
Subject: USB: cxacru: add write-only sysfs attribute for modem configuration

The modem can be configured using CM_REQUEST_CARD_DATA_SET,
although CM_REQUEST_CARD_DATA_GET does not return any data.

Tested by setting the modulation (0x0a) option.

There is a list of parameters in the following archive,
but the meaning of many of them is not well documented:
  http://sourceforge.net/project/shownotes.php?release_id=301825

This source also indicates that the highest parameter set
is 0x4a but this varies by model so an arbitrary limit of
0x7f has been used (the index is a 32-bit integer).

Signed-off-by: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt | 9 +++++++++
 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
index 3532ceecd2c3..f4fbf4cd592c 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
@@ -15,6 +15,15 @@ several sysfs attribute files for retrieving device statistics:
 * adsl_headend_environment
 	Information about the remote headend.
 
+* adsl_config
+	Configuration writing interface.
+	Write parameters in hexadecimal format <index>=<value>,
+	separated by whitespace, e.g.:
+		"1=0 a=5"
+	Up to 7 parameters at a time will be sent and the modem will restart
+	the ADSL connection when any value is set. These are logged for future
+	reference.
+
 * downstream_attenuation (dB)
 * downstream_bits_per_frame
 * downstream_rate (kbps)
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 817db5b34e70650c488f22b072b7efb950812adb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Date: Sat, 21 Nov 2009 15:15:47 +0000
Subject: USB: cxacru: remove cxacru-cf.bin loader

This has never worked properly because wsize passed to
cxacru_cm() is incorrectly set to the number of values
instead of the data bytes. The maximum number of values
that can be set at once is 7 which means the device will
not get enough data to work with and none of the
configuration values will be used.

At least one existing cxacru-cf.bin file contains invalid
data which will prevent the modem from syncing properly.

Fixing it is likely to break existing systems, and the
new sysfs interface for setting configuration parameters
can provide the same functionality. A script is provided
to convert from the original format.

Signed-off-by: Simon Arlott <simon@fire.lp0.eu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/networking/00-INDEX     |  2 ++
 Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py | 48 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt   |  6 +++++
 3 files changed, 56 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
index 50189bf07d53..fe5c099b8fc8 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/networking/00-INDEX
@@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ cs89x0.txt
 	- the Crystal LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA adapter driver
 cxacru.txt
 	- Conexant AccessRunner USB ADSL Modem
+cxacru-cf.py
+	- Conexant AccessRunner USB ADSL Modem configuration file parser
 de4x5.txt
 	- the Digital EtherWORKS DE4?? and DE5?? PCI Ethernet driver
 decnet.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py b/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..b41d298398c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru-cf.py
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env python
+# Copyright 2009 Simon Arlott
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+# Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+# ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU General Public License for
+# more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+# this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
+# Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA  02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# Usage: cxacru-cf.py < cxacru-cf.bin
+# Output: values string suitable for the sysfs adsl_config attribute
+#
+# Warning: cxacru-cf.bin with MD5 hash cdbac2689969d5ed5d4850f117702110
+# contains mis-aligned values which will stop the modem from being able
+# to make a connection. If the first and last two bytes are removed then
+# the values become valid, but the modulation will be forced to ANSI
+# T1.413 only which may not be appropriate.
+#
+# The original binary format is a packed list of le32 values.
+
+import sys
+import struct
+
+i = 0
+while True:
+	buf = sys.stdin.read(4)
+
+	if len(buf) == 0:
+		break
+	elif len(buf) != 4:
+		sys.stdout.write("\n")
+		sys.stderr.write("Error: read {0} not 4 bytes\n".format(len(buf)))
+		sys.exit(1)
+
+	if i > 0:
+		sys.stdout.write(" ")
+	sys.stdout.write("{0:x}={1}".format(i, struct.unpack("<I", buf)[0]))
+	i += 1
+
+sys.stdout.write("\n")
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
index f4fbf4cd592c..2cce04457b4d 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/cxacru.txt
@@ -4,6 +4,12 @@ While it is capable of managing/maintaining the ADSL connection without the
 module loaded, the device will sometimes stop responding after unloading the
 driver and it is necessary to unplug/remove power to the device to fix this.
 
+Note: support for cxacru-cf.bin has been removed. It was not loaded correctly
+so it had no effect on the device configuration. Fixing it could have stopped
+existing devices working when an invalid configuration is supplied.
+
+There is a script cxacru-cf.py to convert an existing file to the sysfs form.
+
 Detected devices will appear as ATM devices named "cxacru". In /sys/class/atm/
 these are directories named cxacruN where N is the device number. A symlink
 named device points to the USB interface device's directory which contains
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From f661c6f8c67bd55e93348f160d590ff9edf08904 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Date: Fri, 11 Dec 2009 16:20:20 -0500
Subject: USB: check the endpoint type against the pipe type

This patch (as1316) adds some error checking to usb_submit_urb().
It's conditional on CONFIG_USB_DEBUG, so it won't affect normal users.
The new check makes sure that the actual type of the endpoint
described by urb->pipe agrees with the type encoded in the pipe value.

The USB error code documentation is updated to include the code
returned by the new check, and the usbfs SUBMITURB handler is updated
to use the correct pipe type when legacy user code tries to submit a
bulk transfer to an interrupt endpoint.

Signed-off-by: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt | 6 ++++--
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt b/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
index 9cf83e8c27b8..d83703ea74b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/error-codes.txt
@@ -41,8 +41,8 @@ USB-specific:
 
 -EFBIG		Host controller driver can't schedule that many ISO frames.
 
--EPIPE		Specified endpoint is stalled.  For non-control endpoints,
-		reset this status with usb_clear_halt().
+-EPIPE		The pipe type specified in the URB doesn't match the
+		endpoint's actual type.
 
 -EMSGSIZE	(a) endpoint maxpacket size is zero; it is not usable
 		    in the current interface altsetting.
@@ -60,6 +60,8 @@ USB-specific:
 
 -EHOSTUNREACH	URB was rejected because the device is suspended.
 
+-ENOEXEC	A control URB doesn't contain a Setup packet.
+
 
 **************************************************************************
 *                   Error codes returned by in urb->status               *
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From ef955341f692475236f0fbe6853f49337dff77a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Oliver Neukum <oliver@neukum.org>
Date: Sat, 16 Jan 2010 01:33:03 +0100
Subject: USB: Export QUIRK_RESET_MORPHS through sysfs

Some devices which use mode switching revert to their
primary mode as they are reset. They must not be reset for
error handling. As user spaces makes the switch it also
has to tell the kernel that a device is quirky.

Signed-off-by: Oliver Neukum <oliver@neukum.org>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb | 11 +++++++++++
 1 file changed, 11 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
index a07c0f366f91..a986e9bbba3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-usb
@@ -159,3 +159,14 @@ Description:
 		device.  This is useful to ensure auto probing won't
 		match the driver to the device.  For example:
 		# echo "046d c315" > /sys/bus/usb/drivers/foo/remove_id
+
+What:		/sys/bus/usb/device/.../avoid_reset
+Date:		December 2009
+Contact:	Oliver Neukum <oliver@neukum.org>
+Description:
+		Writing 1 to this file tells the kernel that this
+		device will morph into another mode when it is reset.
+		Drivers will not use reset for error handling for
+		such devices.
+Users:
+		usb_modeswitch
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 088f7fec8a0e683db72fd8826c5d3ab914e197b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Date: Fri, 8 Jan 2010 12:56:54 -0500
Subject: USB: implement usb_enable_autosuspend

This patch (as1326) adds usb_enable_autosuspend() and
usb_disable_autosuspend() routines for use by drivers.  If a driver
knows that its device can handle suspends and resumes correctly, it
can enable autosuspend all by itself.  This is equivalent to the user
writing "auto" to the device's power/level attribute.

The implementation differs slightly from what it used to be.  Now
autosuspend is disabled simply by doing usb_autoresume_device() (to
increment the usage counter) and enabled by doing
usb_autosuspend_device() (to decrement the usage counter).

The set_level() attribute method is updated to use the new routines,
and the USB Power-Management documentation is updated.

The patch adds a usb_enable_autosuspend() call to the hub driver's
probe routine, allowing the special-case code for hubs in quirks.c to
be removed.

Signed-off-by: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 18 ++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index 3bf6818c8cf5..e3fa189c257a 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -229,6 +229,11 @@ necessary operations by hand or add them to a udev script.  You can
 also change the idle-delay time; 2 seconds is not the best choice for
 every device.
 
+If a driver knows that its device has proper suspend/resume support,
+it can enable autosuspend all by itself.  For example, the video
+driver for a laptop's webcam might do this, since these devices are
+rarely used and so should normally be autosuspended.
+
 Sometimes it turns out that even when a device does work okay with
 autosuspend there are still problems.  For example, there are
 experimental patches adding autosuspend support to the usbhid driver,
@@ -384,6 +389,19 @@ autosuspend, there's no delay for an autoresume.
 	Other parts of the driver interface
 	-----------------------------------
 
+Drivers can enable autosuspend for their devices by calling
+
+	usb_enable_autosuspend(struct usb_device *udev);
+
+in their probe() routine, if they know that the device is capable of
+suspending and resuming correctly.  This is exactly equivalent to
+writing "auto" to the device's power/level attribute.  Likewise,
+drivers can disable autosuspend by calling
+
+	usb_disable_autosuspend(struct usb_device *udev);
+
+This is exactly the same as writing "on" to the power/level attribute.
+
 Sometimes a driver needs to make sure that remote wakeup is enabled
 during autosuspend.  For example, there's not much point
 autosuspending a keyboard if the user can't cause the keyboard to do a
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 9bbdf1e0afe771ca7650f9f476769310bee9d8f3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Date: Fri, 8 Jan 2010 12:57:28 -0500
Subject: USB: convert to the runtime PM framework

This patch (as1329) converts the USB stack over to the PM core's
runtime PM framework.  This involves numerous changes throughout
usbcore, especially to hub.c and driver.c.  Perhaps the most notable
change is that CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND now depends on CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME
instead of CONFIG_PM.

Several fields in the usb_device and usb_interface structures are no
longer needed.  Some code which used to depend on CONFIG_USB_PM now
depends on CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND (requiring some rearrangement of header
files).

The only visible change in behavior should be that following a system
sleep (resume from RAM or resume from hibernation), autosuspended USB
devices will be resumed just like everything else.  They won't remain
suspended.  But if they aren't in use then they will naturally
autosuspend again in a few seconds.

Signed-off-by: Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/usb/power-management.txt | 217 ++++++++++++---------------------
 1 file changed, 77 insertions(+), 140 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
index e3fa189c257a..2790ad48cfc2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/power-management.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 
 		 Alan Stern <stern@rowland.harvard.edu>
 
-			    November 10, 2009
+			    December 11, 2009
 
 
 
@@ -29,9 +29,9 @@ covered to some extent (see Documentation/power/*.txt for more
 information about system PM).
 
 Note: Dynamic PM support for USB is present only if the kernel was
-built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled.  System PM support is present
-only if the kernel was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND or CONFIG_HIBERNATION
-enabled.
+built with CONFIG_USB_SUSPEND enabled (which depends on
+CONFIG_PM_RUNTIME).  System PM support is present only if the kernel
+was built with CONFIG_SUSPEND or CONFIG_HIBERNATION enabled.
 
 
 	What is Remote Wakeup?
@@ -326,64 +326,63 @@ driver does so by calling these six functions:
 	void usb_autopm_get_interface_no_resume(struct usb_interface *intf);
 	void usb_autopm_put_interface_no_suspend(struct usb_interface *intf);
 
-The functions work by maintaining a counter in the usb_interface
-structure.  When intf->pm_usage_count is > 0 then the interface is
-deemed to be busy, and the kernel will not autosuspend the interface's
-device.  When intf->pm_usage_count is <= 0 then the interface is
-considered to be idle, and the kernel may autosuspend the device.
+The functions work by maintaining a usage counter in the
+usb_interface's embedded device structure.  When the counter is > 0
+then the interface is deemed to be busy, and the kernel will not
+autosuspend the interface's device.  When the usage counter is = 0
+then the interface is considered to be idle, and the kernel may
+autosuspend the device.
 
-(There is a similar pm_usage_count field in struct usb_device,
+(There is a similar usage counter field in struct usb_device,
 associated with the device itself rather than any of its interfaces.
-This field is used only by the USB core.)
-
-Drivers must not modify intf->pm_usage_count directly; its value
-should be changed only be using the functions listed above.  Drivers
-are responsible for insuring that the overall change to pm_usage_count
-during their lifetime balances out to 0 (it may be necessary for the
-disconnect method to call usb_autopm_put_interface() one or more times
-to fulfill this requirement).  The first two routines use the PM mutex
-in struct usb_device for mutual exclusion; drivers using the async
-routines are responsible for their own synchronization and mutual
-exclusion.
-
-	usb_autopm_get_interface() increments pm_usage_count and
-	attempts an autoresume if the new value is > 0 and the
-	device is suspended.
-
-	usb_autopm_put_interface() decrements pm_usage_count and
-	attempts an autosuspend if the new value is <= 0 and the
-	device isn't suspended.
+This counter is used only by the USB core.)
+
+Drivers need not be concerned about balancing changes to the usage
+counter; the USB core will undo any remaining "get"s when a driver
+is unbound from its interface.  As a corollary, drivers must not call
+any of the usb_autopm_* functions after their diconnect() routine has
+returned.
+
+Drivers using the async routines are responsible for their own
+synchronization and mutual exclusion.
+
+	usb_autopm_get_interface() increments the usage counter and
+	does an autoresume if the device is suspended.  If the
+	autoresume fails, the counter is decremented back.
+
+	usb_autopm_put_interface() decrements the usage counter and
+	attempts an autosuspend if the new value is = 0.
 
 	usb_autopm_get_interface_async() and
 	usb_autopm_put_interface_async() do almost the same things as
-	their non-async counterparts.  The differences are: they do
-	not acquire the PM mutex, and they use a workqueue to do their
+	their non-async counterparts.  The big difference is that they
+	use a workqueue to do the resume or suspend part of their
 	jobs.  As a result they can be called in an atomic context,
 	such as an URB's completion handler, but when they return the
-	device will not generally not yet be in the desired state.
+	device will generally not yet be in the desired state.
 
 	usb_autopm_get_interface_no_resume() and
 	usb_autopm_put_interface_no_suspend() merely increment or
-	decrement the pm_usage_count value; they do not attempt to
-	carry out an autoresume or an autosuspend.  Hence they can be
-	called in an atomic context.
+	decrement the usage counter; they do not attempt to carry out
+	an autoresume or an autosuspend.  Hence they can be called in
+	an atomic context.
 
-The conventional usage pattern is that a driver calls
+The simplest usage pattern is that a driver calls
 usb_autopm_get_interface() in its open routine and
-usb_autopm_put_interface() in its close or release routine.  But
-other patterns are possible.
+usb_autopm_put_interface() in its close or release routine.  But other
+patterns are possible.
 
 The autosuspend attempts mentioned above will often fail for one
 reason or another.  For example, the power/level attribute might be
 set to "on", or another interface in the same device might not be
 idle.  This is perfectly normal.  If the reason for failure was that
-the device hasn't been idle for long enough, a delayed workqueue
-routine is automatically set up to carry out the operation when the
-autosuspend idle-delay has expired.
+the device hasn't been idle for long enough, a timer is scheduled to
+carry out the operation automatically when the autosuspend idle-delay
+has expired.
 
 Autoresume attempts also can fail, although failure would mean that
 the device is no longer present or operating properly.  Unlike
-autosuspend, there's no delay for an autoresume.
+autosuspend, there's no idle-delay for an autoresume.
 
 
 	Other parts of the driver interface
@@ -413,26 +412,27 @@ though, setting this flag won't cause the kernel to autoresume it.
 Normally a driver would set this flag in its probe method, at which
 time the device is guaranteed not to be autosuspended.)
 
-The synchronous usb_autopm_* routines have to run in a sleepable
-process context; they must not be called from an interrupt handler or
-while holding a spinlock.  In fact, the entire autosuspend mechanism
-is not well geared toward interrupt-driven operation.  However there
-is one thing a driver can do in an interrupt handler:
+If a driver does its I/O asynchronously in interrupt context, it
+should call usb_autopm_get_interface_async() before starting output and
+usb_autopm_put_interface_async() when the output queue drains.  When
+it receives an input event, it should call
 
 	usb_mark_last_busy(struct usb_device *udev);
 
-This sets udev->last_busy to the current time.  udev->last_busy is the
-field used for idle-delay calculations; updating it will cause any
-pending autosuspend to be moved back.  The usb_autopm_* routines will
-also set the last_busy field to the current time.
-
-Calling urb_mark_last_busy() from within an URB completion handler is
-subject to races: The kernel may have just finished deciding the
-device has been idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to
-calling the driver's suspend method.  The driver would have to be
-responsible for synchronizing its suspend method with its URB
-completion handler and causing the autosuspend to fail with -EBUSY if
-an URB had completed too recently.
+in the event handler.  This sets udev->last_busy to the current time.
+udev->last_busy is the field used for idle-delay calculations;
+updating it will cause any pending autosuspend to be moved back.  Most
+of the usb_autopm_* routines will also set the last_busy field to the
+current time.
+
+Asynchronous operation is always subject to races.  For example, a
+driver may call one of the usb_autopm_*_interface_async() routines at
+a time when the core has just finished deciding the device has been
+idle for long enough but not yet gotten around to calling the driver's
+suspend method.  The suspend method must be responsible for
+synchronizing with the output request routine and the URB completion
+handler; it should cause autosuspends to fail with -EBUSY if the
+driver needs to use the device.
 
 External suspend calls should never be allowed to fail in this way,
 only autosuspend calls.  The driver can tell them apart by checking
@@ -440,75 +440,23 @@ the PM_EVENT_AUTO bit in the message.event argument to the suspend
 method; this bit will be set for internal PM events (autosuspend) and
 clear for external PM events.
 
-Many of the ingredients in the autosuspend framework are oriented
-towards interfaces: The usb_interface structure contains the
-pm_usage_cnt field, and the usb_autopm_* routines take an interface
-pointer as their argument.  But somewhat confusingly, a few of the
-pieces (i.e., usb_mark_last_busy()) use the usb_device structure
-instead.  Drivers need to keep this straight; they can call
-interface_to_usbdev() to find the device structure for a given
-interface.
 
+	Mutual exclusion
+	----------------
 
-	Locking requirements
-	--------------------
-
-All three suspend/resume methods are always called while holding the
-usb_device's PM mutex.  For external events -- but not necessarily for
-autosuspend or autoresume -- the device semaphore (udev->dev.sem) will
-also be held.  This implies that external suspend/resume events are
-mutually exclusive with calls to probe, disconnect, pre_reset, and
-post_reset; the USB core guarantees that this is true of internal
-suspend/resume events as well.
+For external events -- but not necessarily for autosuspend or
+autoresume -- the device semaphore (udev->dev.sem) will be held when a
+suspend or resume method is called.  This implies that external
+suspend/resume events are mutually exclusive with calls to probe,
+disconnect, pre_reset, and post_reset; the USB core guarantees that
+this is true of autosuspend/autoresume events as well.
 
 If a driver wants to block all suspend/resume calls during some
-critical section, it can simply acquire udev->pm_mutex. Note that
-calls to resume may be triggered indirectly. Block IO due to memory
-allocations can make the vm subsystem resume a device. Thus while
-holding this lock you must not allocate memory with GFP_KERNEL or
-GFP_NOFS.
-
-Alternatively, if the critical section might call some of the
-usb_autopm_* routines, the driver can avoid deadlock by doing:
-
-	down(&udev->dev.sem);
-	rc = usb_autopm_get_interface(intf);
-
-and at the end of the critical section:
-
-	if (!rc)
-		usb_autopm_put_interface(intf);
-	up(&udev->dev.sem);
-
-Holding the device semaphore will block all external PM calls, and the
-usb_autopm_get_interface() will prevent any internal PM calls, even if
-it fails.  (Exercise: Why?)
-
-The rules for locking order are:
-
-	Never acquire any device semaphore while holding any PM mutex.
-
-	Never acquire udev->pm_mutex while holding the PM mutex for
-	a device that isn't a descendant of udev.
-
-In other words, PM mutexes should only be acquired going up the device
-tree, and they should be acquired only after locking all the device
-semaphores you need to hold.  These rules don't matter to drivers very
-much; they usually affect just the USB core.
-
-Still, drivers do need to be careful.  For example, many drivers use a
-private mutex to synchronize their normal I/O activities with their
-disconnect method.  Now if the driver supports autosuspend then it
-must call usb_autopm_put_interface() from somewhere -- maybe from its
-close method.  It should make the call while holding the private mutex,
-since a driver shouldn't call any of the usb_autopm_* functions for an
-interface from which it has been unbound.
-
-But the usb_autpm_* routines always acquire the device's PM mutex, and
-consequently the locking order has to be: private mutex first, PM
-mutex second.  Since the suspend method is always called with the PM
-mutex held, it mustn't try to acquire the private mutex.  It has to
-synchronize with the driver's I/O activities in some other way.
+critical section, the best way is to lock the device and call
+usb_autopm_get_interface() (and do the reverse at the end of the
+critical section).  Holding the device semaphore will block all
+external PM calls, and the usb_autopm_get_interface() will prevent any
+internal PM calls, even if it fails.  (Exercise: Why?)
 
 
 	Interaction between dynamic PM and system PM
@@ -517,22 +465,11 @@ synchronize with the driver's I/O activities in some other way.
 Dynamic power management and system power management can interact in
 a couple of ways.
 
-Firstly, a device may already be manually suspended or autosuspended
-when a system suspend occurs.  Since system suspends are supposed to
-be as transparent as possible, the device should remain suspended
-following the system resume.  The 2.6.23 kernel obeys this principle
-for manually suspended devices but not for autosuspended devices; they
-do get resumed when the system wakes up.  (Presumably they will be
-autosuspended again after their idle-delay time expires.)  In later
-kernels this behavior will be fixed.
-
-(There is an exception.  If a device would undergo a reset-resume
-instead of a normal resume, and the device is enabled for remote
-wakeup, then the reset-resume takes place even if the device was
-already suspended when the system suspend began.  The justification is
-that a reset-resume is a kind of remote-wakeup event.  Or to put it
-another way, a device which needs a reset won't be able to generate
-normal remote-wakeup signals, so it ought to be resumed immediately.)
+Firstly, a device may already be autosuspended when a system suspend
+occurs.  Since system suspends are supposed to be as transparent as
+possible, the device should remain suspended following the system
+resume.  But this theory may not work out well in practice; over time
+the kernel's behavior in this regard has changed.
 
 Secondly, a dynamic power-management event may occur as a system
 suspend is underway.  The window for this is short, since system
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 6d61ae9112960a2b3ed3360602dfb3bfd357954f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dennis O'Brien <dennis.obrien@eqware.net>
Date: Mon, 15 Feb 2010 08:50:38 -0800
Subject: USB: vstusb.c: removal of driver for Vernier Software & Technology,
 Inc., devices and spectrometers

This patch removes the vstusb driver and support from the Linux tree.
This driver provided support for Vernier Software & Technology devices
and spectrometers (Ocean Optics). This driver is being replaced by a
user space - libusb - implementation.

Signed-off-by: Jim Collar <jim.collar@eqware.net>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt | 1 -
 1 file changed, 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
index 35cf64d4436d..35c9b51d20ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-number.txt
@@ -139,7 +139,6 @@ Code  Seq#(hex)	Include File		Comments
 'K'	all	linux/kd.h
 'L'	00-1F	linux/loop.h		conflict!
 'L'	10-1F	drivers/scsi/mpt2sas/mpt2sas_ctl.h	conflict!
-'L'	20-2F	linux/usb/vstusb.h
 'L'	E0-FF	linux/ppdd.h		encrypted disk device driver
 					<http://linux01.gwdg.de/~alatham/ppdd.html>
 'M'	all	linux/soundcard.h	conflict!
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a3f916f2c84f2b9e1d32cc0dbfe326a9e380dbfb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
Date: Fri, 15 Jan 2010 23:55:21 +0100
Subject: pcmcia: disable pcmcia ioctl for !ARM, prepare for removal

The PCMCIA ioctl -- deprecated for years -- suffers from insufficient
locking. As it already has been deprecated for years, with its removal
long overdue, limit it to !SMP and !PREEMPT.

Furthermore, the last legitimate use of the ioctl to be reported
relates to the ARM architecture in 2008.[1] Attempts to resolve
this issue turned out unsuccessful so far.[2] Other usages have only
been reported as hear-say. If there are any legitiate and necessary
use-cases remaining, please speak out before the end of the grace
period until 2.6.3{5,6}(-rc1).

[1] http://lists.infradead.org/pipermail/linux-pcmcia/2008-April/005440.html
    see also: http://lkml.org/lkml/2008/2/27/291
[2] http://lists.infradead.org/pipermail/linux-pcmcia/2008-April/005450.html
    http://lists.infradead.org/pipermail/linux-pcmcia/2010-January/006740.html
    see also: http://lists.infradead.org/pipermail/linux-pcmcia/2008-April/005453.html

CC: Russell King <rmk+kernel@arm.linux.org.uk>
CC: Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
CC: Robert P. J. Day <rpjday@crashcourse.ca>
CC: Jaswinder Singh Rajput <jaswinder@kernel.org>
CC: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
Signed-off-by: Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
---
 Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 12 +++++++++---
 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index 732b1fa48cf2..3e57a7502e86 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -138,19 +138,25 @@ Who:	Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab@infradead.org>
 ---------------------------
 
 What:	PCMCIA control ioctl (needed for pcmcia-cs [cardmgr, cardctl])
-When:	November 2005
+When:	2.6.35/2.6.36
 Files:	drivers/pcmcia/: pcmcia_ioctl.c
 Why:	With the 16-bit PCMCIA subsystem now behaving (almost) like a
 	normal hotpluggable bus, and with it using the default kernel
 	infrastructure (hotplug, driver core, sysfs) keeping the PCMCIA
 	control ioctl needed by cardmgr and cardctl from pcmcia-cs is
-	unnecessary, and makes further cleanups and integration of the
+	unnecessary and potentially harmful (it does not provide for
+	proper locking), and makes further cleanups and integration of the
 	PCMCIA subsystem into the Linux kernel device driver model more
 	difficult. The features provided by cardmgr and cardctl are either
 	handled by the kernel itself now or are available in the new
 	pcmciautils package available at
 	http://kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/kernel/pcmcia/
-Who:	Dominik Brodowski <linux@brodo.de>
+
+	For all architectures except ARM, the associated config symbol
+	has been removed from kernel 2.6.34; for ARM, it will be likely
+	be removed from kernel 2.6.35. The actual code will then likely
+	be removed from kernel 2.6.36.
+Who:	Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
 
 ---------------------------
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 88b68033b99b16b42e734ab56a4ed6bc1d53516a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Mon, 1 Mar 2010 22:06:25 -0800
Subject: docbook: fix errors from x86 headers merger

Fix docbook errors for x86 headers that were recently merged:

docproc: arch/x86/include/asm/atomic_32.h: No such file or directory
docproc: arch/x86/include/asm/io_32.h: No such file or directory

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Cc: Brian Gerst <brgerst@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl | 2 +-
 Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl   | 2 +-
 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
index f9a6e2c75f12..1b2dd4fc3db2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@
      </sect1>
 
      <sect1><title>Atomic and pointer manipulation</title>
-!Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic_32.h
+!Iarch/x86/include/asm/atomic.h
 !Iarch/x86/include/asm/unaligned.h
      </sect1>
 
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
index 3ed88126ab8f..c1ed6a49e598 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/deviceiobook.tmpl
@@ -316,7 +316,7 @@ CPU B:  spin_unlock_irqrestore(&amp;dev_lock, flags)
 
   <chapter id="pubfunctions">
      <title>Public Functions Provided</title>
-!Iarch/x86/include/asm/io_32.h
+!Iarch/x86/include/asm/io.h
 !Elib/iomap.c
   </chapter>
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 2f99cc6e4688faf5f03f9afe5e1c6097278c75b2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Al Viro <viro@zeniv.linux.org.uk>
Date: Sat, 16 Jan 2010 14:10:21 -0500
Subject: add several pieces to shared subtree documentation

* document locking
* add the missing part of data structure invariants (relationship
between mnt_share and mnt_slave lists in case of a peer group
among slaves).

Signed-off-by: Al Viro <viro@zeniv.linux.org.uk>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt | 16 +++++++++++++++-
 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt
index 23a181074f94..fc0e39af43c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sharedsubtree.txt
@@ -837,6 +837,9 @@ replicas continue to be exactly same.
 	 individual lists does not affect propagation or the way propagation
 	 tree is modified by operations.
 
+	All vfsmounts in a peer group have the same ->mnt_master.  If it is
+	non-NULL, they form a contiguous (ordered) segment of slave list.
+
 	A example propagation tree looks as shown in the figure below.
 	[ NOTE: Though it looks like a forest, if we consider all the shared
 	mounts as a conceptual entity called 'pnode', it becomes a tree]
@@ -874,8 +877,19 @@ replicas continue to be exactly same.
 
 	NOTE: The propagation tree is orthogonal to the mount tree.
 
+8B Locking:
+
+	->mnt_share, ->mnt_slave, ->mnt_slave_list, ->mnt_master are protected
+	by namespace_sem (exclusive for modifications, shared for reading).
+
+	Normally we have ->mnt_flags modifications serialized by vfsmount_lock.
+	There are two exceptions: do_add_mount() and clone_mnt().
+	The former modifies a vfsmount that has not been visible in any shared
+	data structures yet.
+	The latter holds namespace_sem and the only references to vfsmount
+	are in lists that can't be traversed without namespace_sem.
 
-8B Algorithm:
+8C Algorithm:
 
 	The crux of the implementation resides in rbind/move operation.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 5dd4056db84387975140ff2568eaa0406f07985e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Date: Wed, 3 Mar 2010 09:05:00 -0500
Subject: dquot: cleanup space allocation / freeing routines

Get rid of the alloc_space, free_space, reserve_space, claim_space and
release_rsv dquot operations - they are always called from the filesystem
and if a filesystem really needs their own (which none currently does)
it can just call into it's own routine directly.

Move shared logic into the common __dquot_alloc_space,
dquot_claim_space_nodirty and __dquot_free_space low-level methods,
and rationalize the wrappers around it to move as much as possible
code into the common block for CONFIG_QUOTA vs not.  Also rename
all these helpers to be named dquot_* instead of vfs_dq_*.

Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
Signed-off-by: Jan Kara <jack@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 6 +-----
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 5 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 18b9d0ca0630..1192fde11638 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -462,9 +462,7 @@ in sys_read() and friends.
 prototypes:
 	int (*initialize) (struct inode *, int);
 	int (*drop) (struct inode *);
-	int (*alloc_space) (struct inode *, qsize_t, int);
 	int (*alloc_inode) (const struct inode *, unsigned long);
-	int (*free_space) (struct inode *, qsize_t);
 	int (*free_inode) (const struct inode *, unsigned long);
 	int (*transfer) (struct inode *, struct iattr *);
 	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
@@ -481,9 +479,7 @@ What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
 		FS recursion	Held locks when called
 initialize:	yes		maybe dqonoff_sem
 drop:		yes		-
-alloc_space:	->mark_dirty()	-
 alloc_inode:	->mark_dirty()	-
-free_space:	->mark_dirty()	-
 free_inode:	->mark_dirty()	-
 transfer:	yes		-
 write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
@@ -495,7 +491,7 @@ write_info:	yes		dqonoff_sem
 FS recursion means calling ->quota_read() and ->quota_write() from superblock
 operations.
 
-->alloc_space(), ->alloc_inode(), ->free_space(), ->free_inode() are called
+->alloc_inode(), ->free_inode() are called
 only directly by the filesystem and do not call any fs functions only
 the ->mark_dirty() operation.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 63936ddaa16b9486e2d426ed7b09f559a5c60f87 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Date: Wed, 3 Mar 2010 09:05:01 -0500
Subject: dquot: cleanup inode allocation / freeing routines

Get rid of the alloc_inode and free_inode dquot operations - they are
always called from the filesystem and if a filesystem really needs
their own (which none currently does) it can just call into it's
own routine directly.

Also get rid of the vfs_dq_alloc/vfs_dq_free wrappers and always
call the lowlevel dquot_alloc_inode / dqout_free_inode routines
directly, which now lose the number argument which is always 1.

Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
Signed-off-by: Jan Kara <jack@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 8 --------
 1 file changed, 8 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 1192fde11638..4428f55f2131 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -462,8 +462,6 @@ in sys_read() and friends.
 prototypes:
 	int (*initialize) (struct inode *, int);
 	int (*drop) (struct inode *);
-	int (*alloc_inode) (const struct inode *, unsigned long);
-	int (*free_inode) (const struct inode *, unsigned long);
 	int (*transfer) (struct inode *, struct iattr *);
 	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*acquire_dquot) (struct dquot *);
@@ -479,8 +477,6 @@ What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
 		FS recursion	Held locks when called
 initialize:	yes		maybe dqonoff_sem
 drop:		yes		-
-alloc_inode:	->mark_dirty()	-
-free_inode:	->mark_dirty()	-
 transfer:	yes		-
 write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 acquire_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
@@ -491,10 +487,6 @@ write_info:	yes		dqonoff_sem
 FS recursion means calling ->quota_read() and ->quota_write() from superblock
 operations.
 
-->alloc_inode(), ->free_inode() are called
-only directly by the filesystem and do not call any fs functions only
-the ->mark_dirty() operation.
-
 More details about quota locking can be found in fs/dquot.c.
 
 --------------------------- vm_operations_struct -----------------------------
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b43fa8284d7790d9cca32c9c55e24f29be2fa33b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Date: Wed, 3 Mar 2010 09:05:03 -0500
Subject: dquot: cleanup dquot transfer routine

Get rid of the transfer dquot operation - it is now always called from
the filesystem and if a filesystem really needs it's own (which none
currently does) it can just call into it's own routine directly.

Rename the now static low-level dquot_transfer helper to __dquot_transfer
and vfs_dq_transfer to dquot_transfer to have a consistent namespace,
and make the new dquot_transfer return a normal negative errno value
which all callers expect.

Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
Signed-off-by: Jan Kara <jack@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 2 --
 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 4428f55f2131..4574e0272bdd 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -462,7 +462,6 @@ in sys_read() and friends.
 prototypes:
 	int (*initialize) (struct inode *, int);
 	int (*drop) (struct inode *);
-	int (*transfer) (struct inode *, struct iattr *);
 	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*acquire_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*release_dquot) (struct dquot *);
@@ -477,7 +476,6 @@ What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
 		FS recursion	Held locks when called
 initialize:	yes		maybe dqonoff_sem
 drop:		yes		-
-transfer:	yes		-
 write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 acquire_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 release_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 9f7547580263d4a55efe06ce5cfd567f568be6e8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Date: Wed, 3 Mar 2010 09:05:05 -0500
Subject: dquot: cleanup dquot drop routine

Get rid of the drop dquot operation - it is now always called from
the filesystem and if a filesystem really needs it's own (which none
currently does) it can just call into it's own routine directly.

Rename the now static low-level dquot_drop helper to __dquot_drop
and vfs_dq_drop to dquot_drop to have a consistent namespace.

Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
Signed-off-by: Jan Kara <jack@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 2 --
 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 4574e0272bdd..fa10e4bf8e5e 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -461,7 +461,6 @@ in sys_read() and friends.
 --------------------------- dquot_operations -------------------------------
 prototypes:
 	int (*initialize) (struct inode *, int);
-	int (*drop) (struct inode *);
 	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*acquire_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*release_dquot) (struct dquot *);
@@ -475,7 +474,6 @@ What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
 
 		FS recursion	Held locks when called
 initialize:	yes		maybe dqonoff_sem
-drop:		yes		-
 write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 acquire_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 release_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 871a293155a24554e153538d36e3a80fa169aefb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Christoph Hellwig <hch@infradead.org>
Date: Wed, 3 Mar 2010 09:05:07 -0500
Subject: dquot: cleanup dquot initialize routine

Get rid of the initialize dquot operation - it is now always called from
the filesystem and if a filesystem really needs it's own (which none
currently does) it can just call into it's own routine directly.

Rename the now static low-level dquot_initialize helper to __dquot_initialize
and vfs_dq_init to dquot_initialize to have a consistent namespace.

Signed-off-by: Christoph Hellwig <hch@lst.de>
Signed-off-by: Jan Kara <jack@suse.cz>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/Locking | 2 --
 1 file changed, 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index fa10e4bf8e5e..06bbbed71206 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -460,7 +460,6 @@ in sys_read() and friends.
 
 --------------------------- dquot_operations -------------------------------
 prototypes:
-	int (*initialize) (struct inode *, int);
 	int (*write_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*acquire_dquot) (struct dquot *);
 	int (*release_dquot) (struct dquot *);
@@ -473,7 +472,6 @@ a proper locking wrt the filesystem and call the generic quota operations.
 What filesystem should expect from the generic quota functions:
 
 		FS recursion	Held locks when called
-initialize:	yes		maybe dqonoff_sem
 write_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 acquire_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
 release_dquot:	yes		dqonoff_sem or dqptr_sem
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 6771ea1fff988651593f78c122bc02e80f5100a0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:13 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Add support for the Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771AWG/ASG

This chips is found on several Zotac Ion ITX boards, amongst others.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Cc: MC Matti <mcmatti17@googlemail.com>
Cc: Manuel Lamotte-Schubert <mls@pronego.com>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 10 ++++++++++
 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
index 93d8e3d55150..08106ad7089c 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
@@ -84,6 +84,10 @@ Supported chips:
     Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
     Datasheet: Publicly available at the Maxim website
                http://www.maxim-ic.com/quick_view2.cfm/qv_pk/3500
+  * Winbond/Nuvoton W83L771AWG/ASG
+    Prefix: 'w83l771'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available, can be requested from Nuvoton
 
 
 Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
@@ -147,6 +151,12 @@ MAX6680 and MAX6681:
   * Selectable address
   * Remote sensor type selection
 
+W83L771AWG/ASG
+  * The AWG and ASG variants only differ in package format.
+  * Filter and alert configuration register at 0xBF
+  * Diode ideality factor configuration (remote sensor) at 0xE3
+  * Moving average (depending on conversion rate)
+
 All temperature values are given in degrees Celsius. Resolution
 is 1.0 degree for the local temperature, 0.125 degree for the remote
 temperature, except for the MAX6657, MAX6658 and MAX6659 which have a
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 53de33427fa3d7dd62cc5ec75ce0d4e6c6d602dd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:15 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (lm90) Add SMBus alert support

Tested successfully with an ADM1032 chip on its evaluation board. It
should work fine with all other chips as well.

At this point this is more of a proof-of-concept, we don't do anything
terribly useful on SMBus alert: we simply log the event. But this could
later evolve into libsensors signaling so that user-space applications
can take an appropriate action.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Cc: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Trent Piepho <tpiepho@freescale.com>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/lm90 | 12 ++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
index 08106ad7089c..6a03dd4bcc94 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90
@@ -173,6 +173,18 @@ The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than every
 other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return
 'old' values.
 
+SMBus Alert Support
+-------------------
+
+This driver has basic support for SMBus alert. When an alert is received,
+the status register is read and the faulty temperature channel is logged.
+
+The Analog Devices chips (ADM1032 and ADT7461) do not implement the SMBus
+alert protocol properly so additional care is needed: the ALERT output is
+disabled when an alert is received, and is re-enabled only when the alarm
+is gone. Otherwise the chip would block alerts from other chips in the bus
+as long as the alarm is active.
+
 PEC Support
 -----------
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d9b327c310030fa80abbbc9eaaca9f1a6228dbf3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:17 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (it87) Add support for beep on alarm

The IT87xxF chips support beeping on alarm, if properly wired and
configured. There is one control bit for each input type (temperature,
fan, voltage.) Let the user see and change them.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index f9ba96c0ac4a..23b773fa2675 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -136,6 +136,10 @@ registers are read whenever any data is read (unless it is less than 1.5
 seconds since the last update). This means that you can easily miss
 once-only alarms.
 
+Out-of-limit readings can also result in beeping, if the chip is properly
+wired and configured. Beeping can be enabled or disabled per sensor type
+(temperatures, voltages and fans.)
+
 The IT87xx only updates its values each 1.5 seconds; reading it more often
 will do no harm, but will return 'old' values.
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 404a552d8ae6847ae17f3c749bd5d312da08efe4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:21 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (it87) Drop dead web links in documentation

Unfortunately ITE is no longer publicly providing datasheets for their
IT87xxF series of chips. They may send them on request if you ask
politely.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 18 +++++-------------
 1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index 23b773fa2675..a96a70fe802a 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -5,31 +5,23 @@ Supported chips:
   * IT8705F
     Prefix: 'it87'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8705F_V.0.4.1.pdf
+    Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
   * IT8712F
     Prefix: 'it8712'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.1.pdf
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/Errata%20V0.1%20for%20IT8712F%20V0.9.1.pdf
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8712F_V0.9.3.pdf
+    Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
   * IT8716F/IT8726F
     Prefix: 'it8716'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8716F_V0.3.ZIP
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8726F_V0.3.pdf
+    Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
   * IT8718F
     Prefix: 'it8718'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the ITE website
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0.2.zip
-               http://www.ite.com.tw/product_info/file/pc/IT8718F_V0%203_(for%20C%20version).zip
+    Datasheet: Once publicly available at the ITE website, but no longer
   * IT8720F
     Prefix: 'it8720'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-    Datasheet: Not yet publicly available.
+    Datasheet: Not publicly available
   * SiS950   [clone of IT8705F]
     Prefix: 'it87'
     Addresses scanned: from Super I/O config space (8 I/O ports)
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 4f3f51bc21d434f8d91a79438a1957ec0baa9e30 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:21 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (it87) Add support for old automatic fan speed control

Add support for the automatic fan speed control interface as
implemented by IT8705F chips up to revision F and IT8712F chips up to
revision G. This implementation fits very well in our standard sysfs
interface.

I implemented the old and not the new interface because the only chip
I have at hand is an old one, and the new interface is more difficult
to map to the standard sysfs interface. Adding support later should be
possible though, if someone with a supported chip is interested.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 27 +++++++++++++++++++++++++--
 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index a96a70fe802a..0083bd317351 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -146,11 +146,34 @@ Fan speed control
 -----------------
 
 The fan speed control features are limited to manual PWM mode. Automatic
-"Smart Guardian" mode control handling is not implemented. However
-if you want to go for "manual mode" just write 1 to pwmN_enable.
+"Smart Guardian" mode control handling is only implemented for older chips
+(see below.) However if you want to go for "manual mode" just write 1 to
+pwmN_enable.
 
 If you are only able to control the fan speed with very small PWM values,
 try lowering the PWM base frequency (pwm1_freq). Depending on the fan,
 it may give you a somewhat greater control range. The same frequency is
 used to drive all fan outputs, which is why pwm2_freq and pwm3_freq are
 read-only.
+
+
+Automatic fan speed control (old interface)
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The driver supports the old interface to automatic fan speed control
+which is implemented by IT8705F chips up to revision F and IT8712F
+chips up to revision G.
+
+This interface implements 4 temperature vs. PWM output trip points.
+The PWM output of trip point 4 is always the maximum value (fan running
+at full speed) while the PWM output of the other 3 trip points can be
+freely chosen. The temperature of all 4 trip points can be freely chosen.
+Additionally, trip point 1 has an hysteresis temperature attached, to
+prevent fast switching between fan on and off.
+
+The chip automatically computes the PWM output value based on the input
+temperature, based on this simple rule: if the temperature value is
+between trip point N and trip point N+1 then the PWM output value is
+the one of trip point N. The automatic control mode is less flexible
+than the manual control mode, but it reacts faster, is more robust and
+doesn't use CPU cycles.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From cccfc9c4bb3c7888f8249b36e08d6e115238c613 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:21 +0100
Subject: hwmon: (it87) Validate auto pwm settings

Before switching to automatic fan control mode, make sure that all the
trip points make sense. Otherwise, the control loop could lead to
weird fan behavior.

Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/it87 | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/it87 b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
index 0083bd317351..8d08bf0d38ed 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/it87
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/it87
@@ -177,3 +177,7 @@ between trip point N and trip point N+1 then the PWM output value is
 the one of trip point N. The automatic control mode is less flexible
 than the manual control mode, but it reacts faster, is more robust and
 doesn't use CPU cycles.
+
+Trip points must be set properly before switching to automatic fan speed
+control mode. The driver will perform basic integrity checks before
+actually switching to automatic control mode.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d84ca5b345c2b77ebf053d534ada6af2332a43b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Wolfram Sang <w.sang@pengutronix.de>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:23 +0100
Subject: hwmon: Add driver for ADT7411 voltage and temperature sensor

Add basic support for the ADT7411. Reads out all conversion results (via I2C,
SPI yet missing) and allows some on-the-fly configuration. Tested with a
custom board.

Signed-off-by: Sascha Hauer <s.hauer@pengutronix.de>
Signed-off-by: Wolfram Sang <w.sang@pengutronix.de>
Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/adt7411 | 42 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 42 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/adt7411

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1632960f9745
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7411
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+Kernel driver adt7411
+=====================
+
+Supported chips:
+  * Analog Devices ADT7411
+    Prefix: 'adt7411'
+    Addresses scanned: 0x48, 0x4a, 0x4b
+    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
+
+Author: Wolfram Sang (based on adt7470 by Darrick J. Wong)
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7411 chip. There may
+be other chips that implement this interface.
+
+The ADT7411 can use an I2C/SMBus compatible 2-wire interface or an
+SPI-compatible 4-wire interface. It provides a 10-bit analog to digital
+converter which measures 1 temperature, vdd and 8 input voltages. It has an
+internal temperature sensor, but an external one can also be connected (one
+loses 2 inputs then). There are high- and low-limit registers for all inputs.
+
+Check the datasheet for details.
+
+sysfs-Interface
+---------------
+
+in0_input	- vdd voltage input
+in[1-8]_input	- analog 1-8 input
+temp1_input	- temperature input
+
+Besides standard interfaces, this driver adds (0 = off, 1 = on):
+
+  adc_ref_vdd	- Use vdd as reference instead of 2.25 V
+  fast_sampling	- Sample at 22.5 kHz instead of 1.4 kHz, but drop filters
+  no_average	- Turn off averaging over 16 samples
+
+Notes
+-----
+
+SPI, external temperature sensor and limit registers are not supported yet.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d58de038728221f780e11d50b32aa40d420c1150 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: George Joseph <george.joseph@fairview5.com>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:25 +0100
Subject: hwmon: Driver for Andigilog aSC7621 family monitoring chips

Hwmon driver for Andigilog aSC7621 family monitoring chips.

Signed-off-by: George Joseph <george.joseph@fairview5.com>
Acked-by: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/hwmon/asc7621 | 296 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 296 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/asc7621

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621 b/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7287be7e1f21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/asc7621
@@ -0,0 +1,296 @@
+Kernel driver asc7621
+==================
+
+Supported chips:
+    Andigilog aSC7621 and aSC7621a
+    Prefix: 'asc7621'
+    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2c, 0x2d, 0x2e
+    Datasheet: http://www.fairview5.com/linux/asc7621/asc7621.pdf
+
+Author:
+		George Joseph
+
+Description provided by Dave Pivin @ Andigilog:
+
+Andigilog has both the PECI and pre-PECI versions of the Heceta-6, as
+Intel calls them. Heceta-6e has high frequency PWM and Heceta-6p has
+added PECI and a 4th thermal zone. The Andigilog aSC7611 is the
+Heceta-6e part and aSC7621 is the Heceta-6p part. They are both in
+volume production, shipping to Intel and their subs.
+
+We have enhanced both parts relative to the governing Intel
+specification. First enhancement is temperature reading resolution. We
+have used registers below 20h for vendor-specific functions in addition
+to those in the Intel-specified vendor range.
+
+Our conversion process produces a result that is reported as two bytes.
+The fan speed control uses this finer value to produce a "step-less" fan
+PWM output. These two bytes are "read-locked" to guarantee that once a
+high or low byte is read, the other byte is locked-in until after the
+next read of any register. So to get an atomic reading, read high or low
+byte, then the very next read should be the opposite byte. Our data
+sheet says 10-bits of resolution, although you may find the lower bits
+are active, they are not necessarily reliable or useful externally. We
+chose not to mask them.
+
+We employ significant filtering that is user tunable as described in the
+data sheet. Our temperature reports and fan PWM outputs are very smooth
+when compared to the competition, in addition to the higher resolution
+temperature reports. The smoother PWM output does not require user
+intervention.
+
+We offer GPIO features on the former VID pins. These are open-drain
+outputs or inputs and may be used as general purpose I/O or as alarm
+outputs that are based on temperature limits. These are in 19h and 1Ah.
+
+We offer flexible mapping of temperature readings to thermal zones. Any
+temperature may be mapped to any zone, which has a default assignment
+that follows Intel's specs.
+
+Since there is a fan to zone assignment that allows for the "hotter" of
+a set of zones to control the PWM of an individual fan, but there is no
+indication to the user, we have added an indicator that shows which zone
+is currently controlling the PWM for a given fan. This is in register
+00h.
+
+Both remote diode temperature readings may be given an offset value such
+that the reported reading as well as the temperature used to determine
+PWM may be offset for system calibration purposes.
+
+PECI Extended configuration allows for having more than two domains per
+PECI address and also provides an enabling function for each PECI
+address. One could use our flexible zone assignment to have a zone
+assigned to up to 4 PECI addresses. This is not possible in the default
+Intel configuration. This would be useful in multi-CPU systems with
+individual fans on each that would benefit from individual fan control.
+This is in register 0Eh.
+
+The tachometer measurement system is flexible and able to adapt to many
+fan types. We can also support pulse-stretched PWM so that 3-wire fans
+may be used. These characteristics are in registers 04h to 07h.
+
+Finally, we have added a tach disable function that turns off the tach
+measurement system for individual tachs in order to save power. That is
+in register 75h.
+
+--
+aSC7621 Product Description
+
+The aSC7621 has a two wire digital interface compatible with SMBus 2.0.
+Using a 10-bit ADC, the aSC7621 measures the temperature of two remote diode
+connected transistors as well as its own die. Support for Platform
+Environmental Control Interface (PECI) is included.
+
+Using temperature information from these four zones, an automatic fan speed
+control algorithm is employed to minimize acoustic impact while achieving
+recommended CPU temperature under varying operational loads.
+
+To set fan speed, the aSC7621 has three independent pulse width modulation
+(PWM) outputs that are controlled by one, or a combination of three,
+temperature zones. Both high- and low-frequency PWM ranges are supported.
+
+The aSC7621 also includes a digital filter that can be invoked to smooth
+temperature readings for better control of fan speed and minimum acoustic
+impact.
+
+The aSC7621 has tachometer inputs to measure fan speed on up to four fans.
+Limit and status registers for all measured values are included to alert
+the system host that any measurements are outside of programmed limits
+via status registers.
+
+System voltages of VCCP, 2.5V, 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12V motherboard power are
+monitored efficiently with internal scaling resistors.
+
+Features
+- Supports PECI interface and monitors internal and remote thermal diodes
+- 2-wire, SMBus 2.0 compliant, serial interface
+- 10-bit ADC
+- Monitors VCCP, 2.5V, 3.3V, 5.0V, and 12V motherboard/processor supplies
+- Programmable autonomous fan control based on temperature readings
+- Noise filtering of temperature reading for fan speed control
+- 0.25C digital temperature sensor resolution
+- 3 PWM fan speed control outputs for 2-, 3- or 4-wire fans and up to 4 fan
+	tachometer inputs
+- Enhanced measured temperature to Temperature Zone assignment.
+- Provides high and low PWM frequency ranges
+- 3 GPIO pins for custom use
+- 24-Lead QSOP package
+
+Configuration Notes
+===================
+
+Except where noted below, the sysfs entries created by this driver follow
+the standards defined in "sysfs-interface".
+
+temp1_source
+	0 	(default) peci_legacy = 0, Remote 1 Temperature
+			peci_legacy = 1, PECI Processor Temperature 0
+	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
+	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
+	3 	Internal Temperature
+	4 	PECI Processor Temperature 0
+	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
+	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
+	7  PECI Processor Temperature 3
+
+temp2_source
+	0 	(default) Internal Temperature
+	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
+	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
+	3 	Internal Temperature
+	4 	PECI Processor Temperature 0
+	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
+	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
+	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+
+temp3_source
+	0 	(default) Remote 2 Temperature
+	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
+	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
+	3 	Internal Temperature
+	4 	PECI Processor Temperature 0
+	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
+	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
+	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+
+temp4_source
+	0 	(default) peci_legacy = 0, PECI Processor Temperature 0
+			peci_legacy = 1, Remote 1 Temperature
+	1 	Remote 1 Temperature
+	2 	Remote 2 Temperature
+	3 	Internal Temperature
+	4 	PECI Processor Temperature 0
+	5 	PECI Processor Temperature 1
+	6 	PECI Processor Temperature 2
+	7 	PECI Processor Temperature 3
+
+temp[1-4]_smoothing_enable
+temp[1-4]_smoothing_time
+	Smooths spikes in temp readings caused by noise.
+	Valid values in milliseconds are:
+	35000
+	17600
+	11800
+	 7000
+	 4400
+	 3000
+	 1600
+	  800
+
+temp[1-4]_crit
+	When the corresponding zone temperature reaches this value,
+	ALL pwm outputs will got to 100%.
+
+temp[5-8]_input
+temp[5-8]_enable
+	The aSC7621 can also read temperatures provided by the processor
+	via the PECI bus.  Usually these are "core" temps and are relative
+	to the point where the automatic thermal control circuit starts
+	throttling.  This means that these are usually negative numbers.
+
+pwm[1-3]_enable
+	0		Fan off.
+	1		Fan on manual control.
+	2		Fan on automatic control and will run at the minimum pwm
+				if the temperature for the zone is below the minimum.
+	3		Fan on automatic control but will be off if the temperature
+				for the zone is below the minimum.
+	4-254	Ignored.
+	255		Fan on full.
+
+pwm[1-3]_auto_channels
+	Bitmap as described in sysctl-interface with the following
+	exceptions...
+	Only the following combination of zones (and their corresponding masks)
+	are valid:
+	1
+	2
+	3
+	2,3
+	1,2,3
+	4
+	1,2,3,4
+
+	Special values:
+	0			Disabled.
+	16		Fan on manual control.
+	31		Fan on full.
+
+
+pwm[1-3]_invert
+	When set, inverts the meaning of pwm[1-3].
+	i.e.  when pwm = 0, the fan will be on full and
+	when pwm = 255 the fan will be off.
+
+pwm[1-3]_freq
+	PWM frequency in Hz
+	Valid values in Hz are:
+
+	10
+	15
+	23
+	30  (default)
+	38
+	47
+	62
+	94
+	23000
+	24000
+	25000
+	26000
+	27000
+	28000
+	29000
+	30000
+
+	Setting any other value will be ignored.
+
+peci_enable
+	Enables or disables PECI
+
+peci_avg
+	Input filter average time.
+
+	0 	0 Sec. (no Smoothing) (default)
+	1 	0.25 Sec.
+	2 	0.5 Sec.
+	3 	1.0 Sec.
+	4 	2.0 Sec.
+	5 	4.0 Sec.
+	6 	8.0 Sec.
+	7 	0.0 Sec.
+
+peci_legacy
+
+	0	Standard Mode (default)
+		Remote Diode 1 reading is associated with
+		Temperature Zone 1, PECI is associated with
+		Zone 4
+
+	1	Legacy Mode
+		PECI is associated with Temperature Zone 1,
+		Remote Diode 1 is associated with Zone 4
+
+peci_diode
+	Diode filter
+
+	0	0.25 Sec.
+	1 	1.1 Sec.
+	2 	2.4 Sec.  (default)
+	3 	3.4 Sec.
+	4 	5.0 Sec.
+	5 	6.8 Sec.
+	6 	10.2 Sec.
+	7 	16.4 Sec.
+
+peci_4domain
+	Four domain enable
+
+	0 	1 or 2 Domains for enabled processors (default)
+	1 	3 or 4 Domains for enabled processors
+
+peci_domain
+	Domain
+
+	0 	Processor contains a single domain (0) 	 (default)
+	1 	Processor contains two domains (0,1)
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a0a5e3488a51c46f383c5faa86b53828e30ce153 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Amerigo Wang <amwang@redhat.com>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 22:17:26 +0100
Subject: hwmon: Remove the deprecated adt7473 driver

adt7473 driver is obsoleted by adt7475 driver. And it is scheduled
to be removed in Feb 2010.

Signed-off-by: WANG Cong <amwang@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
---
 Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt |  6 ---
 Documentation/hwmon/adt7473                | 74 ------------------------------
 2 files changed, 80 deletions(-)
 delete mode 100644 Documentation/hwmon/adt7473

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index 03497909539e..8debdd625e1a 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -449,12 +449,6 @@ Who:	Alok N Kataria <akataria@vmware.com>
 
 ----------------------------
 
-What:	adt7473 hardware monitoring driver
-When:	February 2010
-Why:	Obsoleted by the adt7475 driver.
-Who:	Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org>
-
----------------------------
 What:	Support for lcd_switch and display_get in asus-laptop driver
 When:	March 2010
 Why:	These two features use non-standard interfaces. There are the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473 b/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473
deleted file mode 100644
index 446612bd1fb9..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/adt7473
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,74 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver adt7473
-======================
-
-Supported chips:
-  * Analog Devices ADT7473
-    Prefix: 'adt7473'
-    Addresses scanned: I2C 0x2C, 0x2D, 0x2E
-    Datasheet: Publicly available at the Analog Devices website
-
-Author: Darrick J. Wong
-
-This driver is depreacted, please use the adt7475 driver instead.
-
-Description
------------
-
-This driver implements support for the Analog Devices ADT7473 chip family.
-
-The ADT7473 uses the 2-wire interface compatible with the SMBUS 2.0
-specification. Using an analog to digital converter it measures three (3)
-temperatures and two (2) voltages. It has four (4) 16-bit counters for
-measuring fan speed. There are three (3) PWM outputs that can be used
-to control fan speed.
-
-A sophisticated control system for the PWM outputs is designed into the
-ADT7473 that allows fan speed to be adjusted automatically based on any of the
-three temperature sensors. Each PWM output is individually adjustable and
-programmable. Once configured, the ADT7473 will adjust the PWM outputs in
-response to the measured temperatures without further host intervention.
-This feature can also be disabled for manual control of the PWM's.
-
-Each of the measured inputs (voltage, temperature, fan speed) has
-corresponding high/low limit values. The ADT7473 will signal an ALARM if
-any measured value exceeds either limit.
-
-The ADT7473 samples all inputs continuously. The driver will not read
-the registers more often than once every other second. Further,
-configuration data is only read once per minute.
-
-Special Features
-----------------
-
-The ADT7473 have a 10-bit ADC and can therefore measure temperatures
-with 0.25 degC resolution. Temperature readings can be configured either
-for twos complement format or "Offset 64" format, wherein 63 is subtracted
-from the raw value to get the temperature value.
-
-The Analog Devices datasheet is very detailed and describes a procedure for
-determining an optimal configuration for the automatic PWM control.
-
-Configuration Notes
--------------------
-
-Besides standard interfaces driver adds the following:
-
-* PWM Control
-
-* pwm#_auto_point1_pwm and temp#_auto_point1_temp and
-* pwm#_auto_point2_pwm and temp#_auto_point2_temp -
-
-point1: Set the pwm speed at a lower temperature bound.
-point2: Set the pwm speed at a higher temperature bound.
-
-The ADT7473 will scale the pwm between the lower and higher pwm speed when
-the temperature is between the two temperature boundaries.  PWM values range
-from 0 (off) to 255 (full speed).  Fan speed will be set to maximum when the
-temperature sensor associated with the PWM control exceeds temp#_max.
-
-Notes
------
-
-The NVIDIA binary driver presents an ADT7473 chip via an on-card i2c bus.
-Unfortunately, they fail to set the i2c adapter class, so this driver may
-fail to find the chip until the nvidia driver is patched.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From c53a381efbe3d0e0629121b3f0d2b62a0e167791 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Mike Snitzer <snitzer@redhat.com>
Date: Sat, 6 Mar 2010 02:29:56 +0000
Subject: dm: document when snapshot has finished merging

Update Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt to cover "How to
determine when a snapshot has finished merging".

Signed-off-by: Mike Snitzer <snitzer@redhat.com>
Signed-off-by: Alasdair G Kergon <agk@redhat.com>
---
 Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt | 44 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 44 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
index e3a77b215135..0d5bc46dc167 100644
--- a/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/snapshot.txt
@@ -122,3 +122,47 @@ volumeGroup-base: 0 2097152 snapshot-merge 254:11 254:12 P 16
 brw-------  1 root root 254, 11 29 ago 18:15 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-real
 brw-------  1 root root 254, 12 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base-cow
 brw-------  1 root root 254, 10 29 ago 18:16 /dev/mapper/volumeGroup-base
+
+
+How to determine when a merging is complete
+===========================================
+The snapshot-merge and snapshot status lines end with:
+  <sectors_allocated>/<total_sectors> <metadata_sectors>
+
+Both <sectors_allocated> and <total_sectors> include both data and metadata.
+During merging, the number of sectors allocated gets smaller and
+smaller.  Merging has finished when the number of sectors holding data
+is zero, in other words <sectors_allocated> == <metadata_sectors>.
+
+Here is a practical example (using a hybrid of lvm and dmsetup commands):
+
+# lvs
+  LV      VG          Attr   LSize Origin  Snap%  Move Log Copy%  Convert
+  base    volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
+  snap    volumeGroup swi-a- 1.00g base  18.97
+
+# dmsetup status volumeGroup-snap
+0 8388608 snapshot 397896/2097152 1560
+                                  ^^^^ metadata sectors
+
+# lvconvert --merge -b volumeGroup/snap
+  Merging of volume snap started.
+
+# lvs volumeGroup/snap
+  LV      VG          Attr   LSize Origin  Snap%  Move Log Copy%  Convert
+  base    volumeGroup Owi-a- 4.00g          17.23
+
+# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+0 8388608 snapshot-merge 281688/2097152 1104
+
+# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+0 8388608 snapshot-merge 180480/2097152 712
+
+# dmsetup status volumeGroup-base
+0 8388608 snapshot-merge 16/2097152 16
+
+Merging has finished.
+
+# lvs
+  LV      VG          Attr   LSize Origin  Snap%  Move Log Copy%  Convert
+  base    volumeGroup owi-a- 4.00g
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 34e55232e59f7b19050267a05ff1226e5cd122a5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:41:40 -0800
Subject: mm: avoid false sharing of mm_counter

Considering the nature of per mm stats, it's the shared object among
threads and can be a cache-miss point in the page fault path.

This patch adds per-thread cache for mm_counter.  RSS value will be
counted into a struct in task_struct and synchronized with mm's one at
events.

Now, in this patch, the event is the number of calls to handle_mm_fault.
Per-thread value is added to mm at each 64 calls.

 rough estimation with small benchmark on parallel thread (2threads) shows
 [before]
     4.5 cache-miss/faults
 [after]
     4.0 cache-miss/faults
 Anyway, the most contended object is mmap_sem if the number of threads grows.

[akpm@linux-foundation.org: coding-style fixes]
Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Minchan Kim <minchan.kim@gmail.com>
Cc: Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org>
Cc: Lee Schermerhorn <lee.schermerhorn@hp.com>
Cc: David Rientjes <rientjes@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 6 ++++++
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 0d07513a67a6..e418f3d8f427 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -188,6 +188,12 @@ memory usage. Its seven fields are explained in Table 1-3.  The stat file
 contains details information about the process itself.  Its fields are
 explained in Table 1-4.
 
+(for SMP CONFIG users)
+For making accounting scalable, RSS related information are handled in
+asynchronous manner and the vaule may not be very precise. To see a precise
+snapshot of a moment, you can see /proc/<pid>/smaps file and scan page table.
+It's slow but very precise.
+
 Table 1-2: Contents of the statm files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
 ..............................................................................
  Field                       Content
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b084d4353ff99d824d3bc5a5c2c22c70b1fba722 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:41:42 -0800
Subject: mm: count swap usage

A frequent questions from users about memory management is what numbers of
swap ents are user for processes.  And this information will give some
hints to oom-killer.

Besides we can count the number of swapents per a process by scanning
/proc/<pid>/smaps, this is very slow and not good for usual process
information handler which works like 'ps' or 'top'.  (ps or top is now
enough slow..)

This patch adds a counter of swapents to mm_counter and update is at each
swap events.  Information is exported via /proc/<pid>/status file as

[kamezawa@bluextal memory]$ cat /proc/self/status
Name:   cat
State:  R (running)
Tgid:   2910
Pid:    2910
PPid:   2823
TracerPid:      0
Uid:    500     500     500     500
Gid:    500     500     500     500
FDSize: 256
Groups: 500
VmPeak:    82696 kB
VmSize:    82696 kB
VmLck:         0 kB
VmHWM:       432 kB
VmRSS:       432 kB
VmData:      172 kB
VmStk:        84 kB
VmExe:        48 kB
VmLib:      1568 kB
VmPTE:        40 kB
VmSwap:        0 kB <=============== this.

[akpm@linux-foundation.org: coding-style fixes]
Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Minchan Kim <minchan.kim@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org>
Cc: Lee Schermerhorn <lee.schermerhorn@hp.com>
Cc: David Rientjes <rientjes@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 2 ++
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index e418f3d8f427..b5c5fc657a88 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -164,6 +164,7 @@ read the file /proc/PID/status:
   VmExe:        68 kB
   VmLib:      1412 kB
   VmPTE:        20 kb
+  VmSwap:        0 kB
   Threads:        1
   SigQ:   0/28578
   SigPnd: 0000000000000000
@@ -219,6 +220,7 @@ Table 1-2: Contents of the statm files (as of 2.6.30-rc7)
  VmExe                       size of text segment
  VmLib                       size of shared library code
  VmPTE                       size of page table entries
+ VmSwap                      size of swap usage (the number of referred swapents)
  Threads                     number of threads
  SigQ                        number of signals queued/max. number for queue
  SigPnd                      bitmap of pending signals for the thread
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From a1b57ac061b0e348c9a878f8fa3a93a67fe6af42 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:42:15 -0800
Subject: mm: document /proc/pagetypeinfo

Add documentation for /proc/pagetypeinfo.

Signed-off-by: Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
Reviewed-by: Christoph Lameter <cl@linux-foundation.org>
Reviewed-by: KOSAKI Motohiro <kosaki.motohiro@jp.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt | 45 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-
 1 file changed, 44 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index b5c5fc657a88..96a44dd95e03 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -438,6 +438,7 @@ Table 1-5: Kernel info in /proc
  modules     List of loaded modules                            
  mounts      Mounted filesystems                               
  net         Networking info (see text)                        
+ pagetypeinfo Additional page allocator information (see text)  (2.5)
  partitions  Table of partitions known to the system           
  pci	     Deprecated info of PCI bus (new way -> /proc/bus/pci/,
              decoupled by lspci					(2.4)
@@ -592,7 +593,7 @@ Node 0, zone      DMA      0      4      5      4      4      3 ...
 Node 0, zone   Normal      1      0      0      1    101      8 ...
 Node 0, zone  HighMem      2      0      0      1      1      0 ...
 
-Memory fragmentation is a problem under some workloads, and buddyinfo is a 
+External fragmentation is a problem under some workloads, and buddyinfo is a
 useful tool for helping diagnose these problems.  Buddyinfo will give you a 
 clue as to how big an area you can safely allocate, or why a previous
 allocation failed.
@@ -602,6 +603,48 @@ available.  In this case, there are 0 chunks of 2^0*PAGE_SIZE available in
 ZONE_DMA, 4 chunks of 2^1*PAGE_SIZE in ZONE_DMA, 101 chunks of 2^4*PAGE_SIZE 
 available in ZONE_NORMAL, etc... 
 
+More information relevant to external fragmentation can be found in
+pagetypeinfo.
+
+> cat /proc/pagetypeinfo
+Page block order: 9
+Pages per block:  512
+
+Free pages count per migrate type at order       0      1      2      3      4      5      6      7      8      9     10
+Node    0, zone      DMA, type    Unmovable      0      0      0      1      1      1      1      1      1      1      0
+Node    0, zone      DMA, type  Reclaimable      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Movable      1      1      2      1      2      1      1      0      1      0      2
+Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Reserve      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      1      0
+Node    0, zone      DMA, type      Isolate      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+Node    0, zone    DMA32, type    Unmovable    103     54     77      1      1      1     11      8      7      1      9
+Node    0, zone    DMA32, type  Reclaimable      0      0      2      1      0      0      0      0      1      0      0
+Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Movable    169    152    113     91     77     54     39     13      6      1    452
+Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Reserve      1      2      2      2      2      0      1      1      1      1      0
+Node    0, zone    DMA32, type      Isolate      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0      0
+
+Number of blocks type     Unmovable  Reclaimable      Movable      Reserve      Isolate
+Node 0, zone      DMA            2            0            5            1            0
+Node 0, zone    DMA32           41            6          967            2            0
+
+Fragmentation avoidance in the kernel works by grouping pages of different
+migrate types into the same contiguous regions of memory called page blocks.
+A page block is typically the size of the default hugepage size e.g. 2MB on
+X86-64. By keeping pages grouped based on their ability to move, the kernel
+can reclaim pages within a page block to satisfy a high-order allocation.
+
+The pagetypinfo begins with information on the size of a page block. It
+then gives the same type of information as buddyinfo except broken down
+by migrate-type and finishes with details on how many page blocks of each
+type exist.
+
+If min_free_kbytes has been tuned correctly (recommendations made by hugeadm
+from libhugetlbfs http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhugetlbfs/), one can
+make an estimate of the likely number of huge pages that can be allocated
+at a given point in time. All the "Movable" blocks should be allocatable
+unless memory has been mlock()'d. Some of the Reclaimable blocks should
+also be allocatable although a lot of filesystem metadata may have to be
+reclaimed to achieve this.
+
 ..............................................................................
 
 meminfo:
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e7c84ee22b8321fa0130a53d4c9806474d62eff0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:42:16 -0800
Subject: mm: document /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX

Add a bare description of what /sys/devices/system/node/nodeX is.  Others
will follow in time but right now, none of that tree is documented.  The
existence of this file might at least encourage people to document new
entries.

Signed-off-by: Mel Gorman <mel@csn.ul.ie>
Reviewed-by: KOSAKI Motohiro <kosaki.motohiro@jp.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node | 7 +++++++
 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..49b82cad7003
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-devices-node
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+What:		/sys/devices/system/node/nodeX
+Date:		October 2002
+Contact:	Linux Memory Management list <linux-mm@kvack.org>
+Description:
+		When CONFIG_NUMA is enabled, this is a directory containing
+		information on node X such as what CPUs are local to the
+		node.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 9a85b8d6049cbb0e7961df2069322fbc4192026a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Andreas Mohr <andi@lisas.de>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:42:39 -0800
Subject: init/main.c: improve usability in case of init binary failure

- new Documentation/init.txt file describing various forms of failure
  trying to load the init binary after kernel bootup

- extend the init/main.c init failure message to direct to
  Documentation/init.txt

Signed-off-by: Andreas Mohr <andi@lisas.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/init.txt | 49 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 49 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/init.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/init.txt b/Documentation/init.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..535ad5e82b98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/init.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+Explaining the dreaded "No init found." boot hang message
+=========================================================
+
+OK, so you've got this pretty unintuitive message (currently located
+in init/main.c) and are wondering what the H*** went wrong.
+Some high-level reasons for failure (listed roughly in order of execution)
+to load the init binary are:
+A) Unable to mount root FS
+B) init binary doesn't exist on rootfs
+C) broken console device
+D) binary exists but dependencies not available
+E) binary cannot be loaded
+
+Detailed explanations:
+0) Set "debug" kernel parameter (in bootloader config file or CONFIG_CMDLINE)
+   to get more detailed kernel messages.
+A) make sure you have the correct root FS type
+   (and root= kernel parameter points to the correct partition),
+   required drivers such as storage hardware (such as SCSI or USB!)
+   and filesystem (ext3, jffs2 etc.) are builtin (alternatively as modules,
+   to be pre-loaded by an initrd)
+C) Possibly a conflict in console= setup --> initial console unavailable.
+   E.g. some serial consoles are unreliable due to serial IRQ issues (e.g.
+   missing interrupt-based configuration).
+   Try using a different console= device or e.g. netconsole= .
+D) e.g. required library dependencies of the init binary such as
+   /lib/ld-linux.so.2 missing or broken. Use readelf -d <INIT>|grep NEEDED
+   to find out which libraries are required.
+E) make sure the binary's architecture matches your hardware.
+   E.g. i386 vs. x86_64 mismatch, or trying to load x86 on ARM hardware.
+   In case you tried loading a non-binary file here (shell script?),
+   you should make sure that the script specifies an interpreter in its shebang
+   header line (#!/...) that is fully working (including its library
+   dependencies). And before tackling scripts, better first test a simple
+   non-script binary such as /bin/sh and confirm its successful execution.
+   To find out more, add code to init/main.c to display kernel_execve()s
+   return values.
+
+Please extend this explanation whenever you find new failure causes
+(after all loading the init binary is a CRITICAL and hard transition step
+which needs to be made as painless as possible), then submit patch to LKML.
+Further TODOs:
+- Implement the various run_init_process() invocations via a struct array
+  which can then store the kernel_execve() result value and on failure
+  log it all by iterating over _all_ results (very important usability fix).
+- try to make the implementation itself more helpful in general,
+  e.g. by providing additional error messages at affected places.
+
+Andreas Mohr <andi at lisas period de>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0347af4ee3922220f6bfe74b87b526aa709a0365 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Kagstrom <simon.kagstrom@netinsight.net>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:42:49 -0800
Subject: lkdtm: add debugfs access and loosen KPROBE ties

Add adds a debugfs interface and additional failure modes to LKDTM to
provide similar functionality to the provoke-crash driver submitted here:

  http://lwn.net/Articles/371208/

Crashes can now be induced either through module parameters (as before)
or through the debugfs interface as in provoke-crash.

The patch also provides a new "direct" interface, where KPROBES are not
used, i.e., the crash is invoked directly upon write to the debugfs
file. When built without KPROBES configured, only this mode is available.

Signed-off-by: Simon Kagstrom <simon.kagstrom@netinsight.net>
Cc: M. Mohan Kumar <mohan@in.ibm.com>
Cc: Americo Wang <xiyou.wangcong@gmail.com>
Cc: David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>
Cc: Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
Cc: "Eric W. Biederman" <ebiederm@xmission.com>,
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt | 38 +++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 38 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt b/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a9d3d81525b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fault-injection/provoke-crashes.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+The lkdtm module provides an interface to crash or injure the kernel at
+predefined crashpoints to evaluate the reliability of crash dumps obtained
+using different dumping solutions. The module uses KPROBEs to instrument
+crashing points, but can also crash the kernel directly without KRPOBE
+support.
+
+
+You can provide the way either through module arguments when inserting
+the module, or through a debugfs interface.
+
+Usage: insmod lkdtm.ko [recur_count={>0}] cpoint_name=<> cpoint_type=<>
+				[cpoint_count={>0}]
+
+  recur_count : Recursion level for the stack overflow test. Default is 10.
+
+  cpoint_name : Crash point where the kernel is to be crashed. It can be
+	 one of INT_HARDWARE_ENTRY, INT_HW_IRQ_EN, INT_TASKLET_ENTRY,
+	 FS_DEVRW, MEM_SWAPOUT, TIMERADD, SCSI_DISPATCH_CMD,
+	 IDE_CORE_CP, DIRECT
+
+  cpoint_type : Indicates the action to be taken on hitting the crash point.
+     It can be one of PANIC, BUG, EXCEPTION, LOOP, OVERFLOW,
+     CORRUPT_STACK, UNALIGNED_LOAD_STORE_WRITE, OVERWRITE_ALLOCATION,
+     WRITE_AFTER_FREE,
+
+  cpoint_count : Indicates the number of times the crash point is to be hit
+    to trigger an action. The default is 10.
+
+You can also induce failures by mounting debugfs and writing the type to
+<mountpoint>/provoke-crash/<crashpoint>. E.g.,
+
+  mount -t debugfs debugfs /mnt
+  echo EXCEPTION > /mnt/provoke-crash/INT_HARDWARE_ENTRY
+
+
+A special file is `DIRECT' which will induce the crash directly without
+KPROBE instrumentation. This mode is the only one available when the module
+is built on a kernel without KPROBEs support.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 3e45f1d1155894e6f4291f5536b224874d52d8e2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
Date: Fri, 5 Mar 2010 13:44:35 -0800
Subject: gpio: introduce gpio_request_one() and friends

gpio_request() without initial configuration of the GPIO is normally
useless, introduce gpio_request_one() together with GPIOF_ flags for
input/output direction and initial output level.

gpio_{request,free}_array() for multiple GPIOs.

Signed-off-by: Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
Cc: David Brownell <dbrownell@users.sourceforge.net>
Cc: Ben Nizette <bn@niasdigital.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/gpio.txt | 64 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 64 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt
index 1866c27eec69..c2c6e9b39bbe 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt
@@ -253,6 +253,70 @@ pin setup (e.g. controlling which pin the GPIO uses, pullup/pulldown).
 Also note that it's your responsibility to have stopped using a GPIO
 before you free it.
 
+Considering in most cases GPIOs are actually configured right after they
+are claimed, three additional calls are defined:
+
+	/* request a single GPIO, with initial configuration specified by
+	 * 'flags', identical to gpio_request() wrt other arguments and
+	 * return value
+	 */
+	int gpio_request_one(unsigned gpio, unsigned long flags, const char *label);
+
+	/* request multiple GPIOs in a single call
+	 */
+	int gpio_request_array(struct gpio *array, size_t num);
+
+	/* release multiple GPIOs in a single call
+	 */
+	void gpio_free_array(struct gpio *array, size_t num);
+
+where 'flags' is currently defined to specify the following properties:
+
+	* GPIOF_DIR_IN		- to configure direction as input
+	* GPIOF_DIR_OUT		- to configure direction as output
+
+	* GPIOF_INIT_LOW	- as output, set initial level to LOW
+	* GPIOF_INIT_HIGH	- as output, set initial level to HIGH
+
+since GPIOF_INIT_* are only valid when configured as output, so group valid
+combinations as:
+
+	* GPIOF_IN		- configure as input
+	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW	- configured as output, initial level LOW
+	* GPIOF_OUT_INIT_HIGH	- configured as output, initial level HIGH
+
+In the future, these flags can be extended to support more properties such
+as open-drain status.
+
+Further more, to ease the claim/release of multiple GPIOs, 'struct gpio' is
+introduced to encapsulate all three fields as:
+
+	struct gpio {
+		unsigned	gpio;
+		unsigned long	flags;
+		const char	*label;
+	};
+
+A typical example of usage:
+
+	static struct gpio leds_gpios[] = {
+		{ 32, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_HIGH, "Power LED" }, /* default to ON */
+		{ 33, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Green LED" }, /* default to OFF */
+		{ 34, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Red LED"   }, /* default to OFF */
+		{ 35, GPIOF_OUT_INIT_LOW,  "Blue LED"  }, /* default to OFF */
+		{ ... },
+	};
+
+	err = gpio_request_one(31, GPIOF_IN, "Reset Button");
+	if (err)
+		...
+
+	err = gpio_request_array(leds_gpios, ARRAY_SIZE(leds_gpios));
+	if (err)
+		...
+
+	gpio_free_array(leds_gpios, ARRAY_SIZE(leds_gpios));
+
 
 GPIOs mapped to IRQs
 --------------------
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 87d1b3e60b55ef65f10054ccc319e5d67cf010e9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Rafael J. Wysocki" <rjw@sisk.pl>
Date: Sat, 6 Mar 2010 21:28:17 +0100
Subject: PM / Runtime: Document power.runtime_auto and related functions

The power.runtime_auto device flag and the helper functions
pm_runtime_allow() and pm_runtime_forbid() used to modify it are a
part of the run-time power management framework and therefore they
should be described in Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt.

Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
---
 Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 28 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 28 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index 356fd86f4ea8..f19370641684 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -224,6 +224,12 @@ defined in include/linux/pm.h:
       RPM_SUSPENDED, which means that each device is initially regarded by the
       PM core as 'suspended', regardless of its real hardware status
 
+  unsigned int runtime_auto;
+    - if set, indicates that the user space has allowed the device driver to
+      power manage the device at run time via the /sys/devices/.../power/control
+      interface; it may only be modified with the help of the pm_runtime_allow()
+      and pm_runtime_forbid() helper functions
+
 All of the above fields are members of the 'power' member of 'struct device'.
 
 4. Run-time PM Device Helper Functions
@@ -329,6 +335,16 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than
       zero)
 
+  void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev);
+    - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage
+      counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to
+      effectively allow the device to be power managed at run time)
+
+  void pm_runtime_forbid(struct device *dev);
+    - unset the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and increase its usage
+      counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to
+      effectively prevent the device from being power managed at run time)
+
 It is safe to execute the following helper functions from interrupt context:
 
 pm_request_idle()
@@ -382,6 +398,18 @@ may be desirable to suspend the device as soon as ->probe() or ->remove() has
 finished, so the PM core uses pm_runtime_idle_sync() to invoke the
 subsystem-level idle callback for the device at that time.
 
+The user space can effectively disallow the driver of the device to power manage
+it at run time by changing the value of its /sys/devices/.../power/control
+attribute to "on", which causes pm_runtime_forbid() to be called.  In principle,
+this mechanism may also be used by the driver to effectively turn off the
+run-time power management of the device until the user space turns it on.
+Namely, during the initialization the driver can make sure that the run-time PM
+status of the device is 'active' and call pm_runtime_forbid().  It should be
+noted, however, that if the user space has already intentionally changed the
+value of /sys/devices/.../power/control to "auto" to allow the driver to power
+manage the device at run time, the driver may confuse it by using
+pm_runtime_forbid() this way.
+
 6. Run-time PM and System Sleep
 
 Run-time PM and system sleep (i.e., system suspend and hibernation, also known
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d690b2cd222afc75320b9b8e9da7df02e9e630ca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Rafael J. Wysocki" <rjw@sisk.pl>
Date: Sat, 6 Mar 2010 21:28:37 +0100
Subject: PM: Provide generic subsystem-level callbacks

There are subsystems whose power management callbacks only need to
invoke the callbacks provided by device drivers.  Still, their system
sleep PM callbacks should play well with the runtime PM callbacks,
so that devices suspended at run time can be left in that state for
a system sleep transition.

Provide a set of generic PM callbacks for such subsystems and
define convenience macros for populating dev_pm_ops structures.

Signed-off-by: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>
---
 Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt | 65 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 65 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
index f19370641684..ab00eeddecaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/power/runtime_pm.txt
@@ -335,6 +335,10 @@ drivers/base/power/runtime.c and include/linux/pm_runtime.h:
       'power.runtime_error' is set or 'power.disable_depth' is greater than
       zero)
 
+  bool pm_runtime_suspended(struct device *dev);
+    - return true if the device's runtime PM status is 'suspended', or false
+      otherwise
+
   void pm_runtime_allow(struct device *dev);
     - set the power.runtime_auto flag for the device and decrease its usage
       counter (used by the /sys/devices/.../power/control interface to
@@ -459,3 +463,64 @@ The PM core always increments the run-time usage counter before calling the
 ->prepare() callback and decrements it after calling the ->complete() callback.
 Hence disabling run-time PM temporarily like this will not cause any run-time
 suspend callbacks to be lost.
+
+7. Generic subsystem callbacks
+
+Subsystems may wish to conserve code space by using the set of generic power
+management callbacks provided by the PM core, defined in
+driver/base/power/generic_ops.c:
+
+  int pm_generic_runtime_idle(struct device *dev);
+    - invoke the ->runtime_idle() callback provided by the driver of this
+      device, if defined, and call pm_runtime_suspend() for this device if the
+      return value is 0 or the callback is not defined
+
+  int pm_generic_runtime_suspend(struct device *dev);
+    - invoke the ->runtime_suspend() callback provided by the driver of this
+      device and return its result, or return -EINVAL if not defined
+
+  int pm_generic_runtime_resume(struct device *dev);
+    - invoke the ->runtime_resume() callback provided by the driver of this
+      device and return its result, or return -EINVAL if not defined
+
+  int pm_generic_suspend(struct device *dev);
+    - if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->suspend()
+      callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
+      defined
+
+  int pm_generic_resume(struct device *dev);
+    - invoke the ->resume() callback provided by the driver of this device and,
+      if successful, change the device's runtime PM status to 'active'
+
+  int pm_generic_freeze(struct device *dev);
+    - if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->freeze()
+      callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
+      defined
+
+  int pm_generic_thaw(struct device *dev);
+    - if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->thaw()
+      callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
+      defined
+
+  int pm_generic_poweroff(struct device *dev);
+    - if the device has not been suspended at run time, invoke the ->poweroff()
+      callback provided by its driver and return its result, or return 0 if not
+      defined
+
+  int pm_generic_restore(struct device *dev);
+    - invoke the ->restore() callback provided by the driver of this device and,
+      if successful, change the device's runtime PM status to 'active'
+
+These functions can be assigned to the ->runtime_idle(), ->runtime_suspend(),
+->runtime_resume(), ->suspend(), ->resume(), ->freeze(), ->thaw(), ->poweroff(),
+or ->restore() callback pointers in the subsystem-level dev_pm_ops structures.
+
+If a subsystem wishes to use all of them at the same time, it can simply assign
+the GENERIC_SUBSYS_PM_OPS macro, defined in include/linux/pm.h, to its
+dev_pm_ops structure pointer.
+
+Device drivers that wish to use the same function as a system suspend, freeze,
+poweroff and run-time suspend callback, and similarly for system resume, thaw,
+restore, and run-time resume, can achieve this with the help of the
+UNIVERSAL_DEV_PM_OPS macro defined in include/linux/pm.h (possibly setting its
+last argument to NULL).
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 192505bdb4e43ecbd11627bc0e205875edba473c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Wolfgang Grandegger <wg@denx.de>
Date: Wed, 17 Feb 2010 11:19:20 +0100
Subject: powerpc: doc/dts-bindings: update doc of FSL I2C bindings

This patch adds the MPC5121 to the list of supported devices,
enhances the doc of the "clock-frequency" property and removes
the obsolete "cell-index", "device_type" and "fsl-i2c" property.
Furthermore an example for the MPC5121 has been added.

Signed-off-by: Wolfgang Grandegger <wg@denx.de>
Reviewed-by: Wolfram Sang <w.sang@pengutronix.de>
Signed-off-by: Ben Dooks <ben-linux@fluff.org>
---
 Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt | 30 +++++++++++++++++++-------
 1 file changed, 22 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt
index b6d2e21474f9..50da20310585 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/i2c.txt
@@ -2,15 +2,14 @@
 
 Required properties :
 
- - device_type : Should be "i2c"
  - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
+ - compatible : should be "fsl,CHIP-i2c" where CHIP is the name of a
+   compatible processor, e.g. mpc8313, mpc8543, mpc8544, mpc5121,
+   mpc5200 or mpc5200b. For the mpc5121, an additional node
+   "fsl,mpc5121-i2c-ctrl" is required as shown in the example below.
 
 Recommended properties :
 
- - compatible : compatibility list with 2 entries, the first should
-   be "fsl,CHIP-i2c" where CHIP is the name of a compatible processor,
-   e.g. mpc8313, mpc8543, mpc8544, mpc5200 or mpc5200b. The second one
-   should be "fsl-i2c".
  - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a
    field that represents an encoding of the sense and level
    information for the interrupt.  This should be encoded based on
@@ -24,25 +23,40 @@ Recommended properties :
 
 Examples :
 
+	/* MPC5121 based board */
+	i2c@1740 {
+		#address-cells = <1>;
+		#size-cells = <0>;
+		compatible = "fsl,mpc5121-i2c", "fsl-i2c";
+		reg = <0x1740 0x20>;
+		interrupts = <11 0x8>;
+		interrupt-parent = <&ipic>;
+		clock-frequency = <100000>;
+	};
+
+	i2ccontrol@1760 {
+		compatible = "fsl,mpc5121-i2c-ctrl";
+		reg = <0x1760 0x8>;
+	};
+
+	/* MPC5200B based board */
 	i2c@3d00 {
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <0>;
 		compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-i2c","fsl,mpc5200-i2c","fsl-i2c";
-		cell-index = <0>;
 		reg = <0x3d00 0x40>;
 		interrupts = <2 15 0>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&mpc5200_pic>;
 		fsl,preserve-clocking;
 	};
 
+	/* MPC8544 base board */
 	i2c@3100 {
 		#address-cells = <1>;
 		#size-cells = <0>;
-		cell-index = <1>;
 		compatible = "fsl,mpc8544-i2c", "fsl-i2c";
 		reg = <0x3100 0x100>;
 		interrupts = <43 2>;
 		interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
 		clock-frequency = <400000>;
 	};
-
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From c607cf0c20903f22919c187d1db4f3256c58f0c5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Stefan Richter <stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de>
Date: Fri, 15 Jan 2010 13:23:51 +0100
Subject: HOWTO: Updates on subsystem trees, patchwork, -next (vs. -mm)

One of the roles which -mm fulfilled some time ago (to offer an
integration testing ground) has been taken over by -next.  This is still
news to Documentation/HOWTO, so mention it there.

Also add a word on how patchwork is used to track patches as they make
their way into subsystem trees.  Remove some arbitrary links to
subsystem repositories; they can all be found in the MAINTAINERS
database.

Acked-by: Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@xenotime.net>
Signed-off-by: Stefan Richter <stefanr@s5r6.in-berlin.de>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/HOWTO | 113 +++++++++++++++++-----------------------------------
 1 file changed, 36 insertions(+), 77 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index 8495fc970391..f5395af88a41 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -221,8 +221,8 @@ branches.  These different branches are:
   - main 2.6.x kernel tree
   - 2.6.x.y -stable kernel tree
   - 2.6.x -git kernel patches
-  - 2.6.x -mm kernel patches
   - subsystem specific kernel trees and patches
+  - the 2.6.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
 
 2.6.x kernel tree
 -----------------
@@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ process is as follows:
   - As soon as a new kernel is released a two weeks window is open,
     during this period of time maintainers can submit big diffs to
     Linus, usually the patches that have already been included in the
-    -mm kernel for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
+    -next kernel for a few weeks.  The preferred way to submit big changes
     is using git (the kernel's source management tool, more information
     can be found at http://git.or.cz/) but plain patches are also just
     fine.
@@ -293,84 +293,43 @@ daily and represent the current state of Linus' tree.  They are more
 experimental than -rc kernels since they are generated automatically
 without even a cursory glance to see if they are sane.
 
-2.6.x -mm kernel patches
-------------------------
-These are experimental kernel patches released by Andrew Morton.  Andrew
-takes all of the different subsystem kernel trees and patches and mushes
-them together, along with a lot of patches that have been plucked from
-the linux-kernel mailing list.  This tree serves as a proving ground for
-new features and patches.  Once a patch has proved its worth in -mm for
-a while Andrew or the subsystem maintainer pushes it on to Linus for
-inclusion in mainline.
-
-It is heavily encouraged that all new patches get tested in the -mm tree
-before they are sent to Linus for inclusion in the main kernel tree.  Code
-which does not make an appearance in -mm before the opening of the merge
-window will prove hard to merge into the mainline.
-
-These kernels are not appropriate for use on systems that are supposed
-to be stable and they are more risky to run than any of the other
-branches.
-
-If you wish to help out with the kernel development process, please test
-and use these kernel releases and provide feedback to the linux-kernel
-mailing list if you have any problems, and if everything works properly.
-
-In addition to all the other experimental patches, these kernels usually
-also contain any changes in the mainline -git kernels available at the
-time of release.
-
-The -mm kernels are not released on a fixed schedule, but usually a few
--mm kernels are released in between each -rc kernel (1 to 3 is common).
-
 Subsystem Specific kernel trees and patches
 -------------------------------------------
-A number of the different kernel subsystem developers expose their
-development trees so that others can see what is happening in the
-different areas of the kernel.  These trees are pulled into the -mm
-kernel releases as described above.
-
-Here is a list of some of the different kernel trees available:
-  git trees:
-    - Kbuild development tree, Sam Ravnborg <sam@ravnborg.org>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git
-
-    - ACPI development tree, Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git
-
-    - Block development tree, Jens Axboe <jens.axboe@oracle.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git
-
-    - DRM development tree, Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git
-
-    - ia64 development tree, Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git
-
-    - infiniband, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git
-
-    - libata, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git
-
-    - network drivers, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git
-
-    - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
-
-    - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com>
-	git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
-
-    - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
-	git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git
-
-  quilt trees:
-    - USB, Driver Core, and I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
-	kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/
+The maintainers of the various kernel subsystems --- and also many
+kernel subsystem developers --- expose their current state of
+development in source repositories.  That way, others can see what is
+happening in the different areas of the kernel.  In areas where
+development is rapid, a developer may be asked to base his submissions
+onto such a subsystem kernel tree so that conflicts between the
+submission and other already ongoing work are avoided.
+
+Most of these repositories are git trees, but there are also other SCMs
+in use, or patch queues being published as quilt series.  Addresses of
+these subsystem repositories are listed in the MAINTAINERS file.  Many
+of them can be browsed at http://git.kernel.org/.
+
+Before a proposed patch is committed to such a subsystem tree, it is
+subject to review which primarily happens on mailing lists (see the
+respective section below).  For several kernel subsystems, this review
+process is tracked with the tool patchwork.  Patchwork offers a web
+interface which shows patch postings, any comments on a patch or
+revisions to it, and maintainers can mark patches as under review,
+accepted, or rejected.  Most of these patchwork sites are listed at
+http://patchwork.kernel.org/ or http://patchwork.ozlabs.org/.
+
+2.6.x -next kernel tree for integration tests
+---------------------------------------------
+Before updates from subsystem trees are merged into the mainline 2.6.x
+tree, they need to be integration-tested.  For this purpose, a special
+testing repository exists into which virtually all subsystem trees are
+pulled on an almost daily basis:
+	http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git
+	http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/
+
+This way, the -next kernel gives a summary outlook onto what will be
+expected to go into the mainline kernel at the next merge period.
+Adventurous testers are very welcome to runtime-test the -next kernel.
 
-  Other kernel trees can be found listed at http://git.kernel.org/ and in
-  the MAINTAINERS file.
 
 Bug Reporting
 -------------
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 52cf25d0ab7f78eeecc59ac652ed5090f69b619e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Emese Revfy <re.emese@gmail.com>
Date: Tue, 19 Jan 2010 02:58:23 +0100
Subject: Driver core: Constify struct sysfs_ops in struct kobj_type

Constify struct sysfs_ops.

This is part of the ops structure constification
effort started by Arjan van de Ven et al.

Benefits of this constification:

 * prevents modification of data that is shared
   (referenced) by many other structure instances
   at runtime

 * detects/prevents accidental (but not intentional)
   modification attempts on archs that enforce
   read-only kernel data at runtime

 * potentially better optimized code as the compiler
   can assume that the const data cannot be changed

 * the compiler/linker move const data into .rodata
   and therefore exclude them from false sharing

Signed-off-by: Emese Revfy <re.emese@gmail.com>
Acked-by: David Teigland <teigland@redhat.com>
Acked-by: Matt Domsch <Matt_Domsch@dell.com>
Acked-by: Maciej Sosnowski <maciej.sosnowski@intel.com>
Acked-by: Hans J. Koch <hjk@linutronix.de>
Acked-by: Pekka Enberg <penberg@cs.helsinki.fi>
Acked-by: Jens Axboe <jens.axboe@oracle.com>
Acked-by: Stephen Hemminger <shemminger@vyatta.com>
Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de>
---
 Documentation/kobject.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kobject.txt b/Documentation/kobject.txt
index c79ab996dada..bdb13817e1e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/kobject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kobject.txt
@@ -266,7 +266,7 @@ kobj_type:
 
     struct kobj_type {
 	    void (*release)(struct kobject *);
-	    struct sysfs_ops	*sysfs_ops;
+	    const struct sysfs_ops *sysfs_ops;
 	    struct attribute	**default_attrs;
     };
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e61863099f58e458f08c101da87da752a1e009f5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:21:56 -0800
Subject: Documentation/timers/: split txt and source files

Documentation/timers/hpet.txt:
Expose example and tool source files in the Documentation/timers/ directory in
their own files instead of being buried (almost hidden) in readme/txt files.
This should help to prevent bitrot.

This will make them more visible/usable to users who may need
to use them, to developers who may need to test with them, and
to anyone who would fix/update them if they were more visible.

Also, if any of these possibly should not be in the kernel tree at
all, it will be clearer that they are here and we can discuss if
they should be removed.

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Cc: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/Makefile              |   2 +-
 Documentation/timers/00-INDEX       |   2 +
 Documentation/timers/Makefile       |   8 ++
 Documentation/timers/hpet.txt       | 273 +-----------------------------------
 Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c | 269 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 5 files changed, 282 insertions(+), 272 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/Makefile
 create mode 100644 Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
index 94b945733534..78d74f6a3834 100644
--- a/Documentation/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
 	filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \
-	pcmcia/ spi/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
+	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
index 397dc35e1323..a9248da5cdbc 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/timers/00-INDEX
@@ -4,6 +4,8 @@ highres.txt
 	- High resolution timers and dynamic ticks design notes
 hpet.txt
 	- High Precision Event Timer Driver for Linux
+hpet_example.c
+	- sample hpet timer test program
 hrtimers.txt
 	- subsystem for high-resolution kernel timers
 timer_stats.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/Makefile b/Documentation/timers/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c85625f4ab25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/timers/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := hpet_example
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
index 16d25e6b5a00..767392ffd31e 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet.txt
@@ -26,274 +26,5 @@ initialization.  An example of this initialization can be found in
 arch/x86/kernel/hpet.c.
 
 The driver provides a userspace API which resembles the API found in the
-RTC driver framework.  An example user space program is provided below.
-
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <memory.h>
-#include <malloc.h>
-#include <time.h>
-#include <ctype.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/wait.h>
-#include <signal.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <sys/time.h>
-#include <linux/hpet.h>
-
-
-extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **);
-extern void hpet_info(int, const char **);
-extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **);
-extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **);
-extern void hpet_read(int, const char **);
-
-#include <sys/poll.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <signal.h>
-
-struct hpet_command {
-	char		*command;
-	void		(*func)(int argc, const char ** argv);
-} hpet_command[] = {
-	{
-		"open-close",
-		hpet_open_close
-	},
-	{
-		"info",
-		hpet_info
-	},
-	{
-		"poll",
-		hpet_poll
-	},
-	{
-		"fasync",
-		hpet_fasync
-	},
-};
-
-int
-main(int argc, const char ** argv)
-{
-	int	i;
-
-	argc--;
-	argv++;
-
-	if (!argc) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n");
-		return -1;
-	}
-
-
-	for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++)
-		if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) {
-			argc--;
-			argv++;
-			fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n",
-				hpet_command[i].command);
-			hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv);
-			return 0;
-		}
-
-	fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]);
-
-	return -1;
-}
-
-void
-hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv)
-{
-	int	fd;
-
-	if (argc != 1) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
-	if (fd < 0)
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n");
-	else
-		close(fd);
-
-	return;
-}
-
-void
-hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv)
-{
-}
-
-void
-hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv)
-{
-	unsigned long		freq;
-	int			iterations, i, fd;
-	struct pollfd		pfd;
-	struct hpet_info	info;
-	struct timeval		stv, etv;
-	struct timezone		tz;
-	long			usec;
-
-	if (argc != 3) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	freq = atoi(argv[1]);
-	iterations = atoi(argv[2]);
-
-	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
-
-	if (fd < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]);
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags);
-
-	if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	pfd.fd = fd;
-	pfd.events = POLLIN;
-
-	for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
-		pfd.revents = 0;
-		gettimeofday(&stv, &tz);
-		if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0)
-			fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n");
-		else {
-			long 	data;
-
-			gettimeofday(&etv, &tz);
-			usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec;
-			usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec;
-
-			fprintf(stderr,
-				"hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec);
-
-			fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n",
-				pfd.revents);
-
-			if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) {
-				fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n");
-			}
-			else
-				fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n",
-					data);
-		}
-	}
-
-out:
-	close(fd);
-	return;
-}
-
-static int hpet_sigio_count;
-
-static void
-hpet_sigio(int val)
-{
-	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n");
-	hpet_sigio_count++;
-}
-
-void
-hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv)
-{
-	unsigned long		freq;
-	int			iterations, i, fd, value;
-	sig_t			oldsig;
-	struct hpet_info	info;
-
-	hpet_sigio_count = 0;
-	fd = -1;
-
-	if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n");
-		return;
-	}
-
-	if (argc != 3) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
-
-	if (fd < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]);
-		return;
-	}
-
-
-	if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) ||
-		((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) ||
-		(fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	freq = atoi(argv[1]);
-	iterations = atoi(argv[2]);
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags);
-
-	if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) {
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n");
-		goto out;
-	}
-
-	for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
-		(void) pause();
-		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count);
-	}
-
-out:
-	signal(SIGIO, oldsig);
-
-	if (fd >= 0)
-		close(fd);
-
-	return;
-}
+RTC driver framework.  An example user space program is provided in
+file:Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c b/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f9ce2d9fdfd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/timers/hpet_example.c
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <memory.h>
+#include <malloc.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/wait.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <linux/hpet.h>
+
+
+extern void hpet_open_close(int, const char **);
+extern void hpet_info(int, const char **);
+extern void hpet_poll(int, const char **);
+extern void hpet_fasync(int, const char **);
+extern void hpet_read(int, const char **);
+
+#include <sys/poll.h>
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+
+struct hpet_command {
+	char		*command;
+	void		(*func)(int argc, const char ** argv);
+} hpet_command[] = {
+	{
+		"open-close",
+		hpet_open_close
+	},
+	{
+		"info",
+		hpet_info
+	},
+	{
+		"poll",
+		hpet_poll
+	},
+	{
+		"fasync",
+		hpet_fasync
+	},
+};
+
+int
+main(int argc, const char ** argv)
+{
+	int	i;
+
+	argc--;
+	argv++;
+
+	if (!argc) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: requires command\n");
+		return -1;
+	}
+
+
+	for (i = 0; i < (sizeof (hpet_command) / sizeof (hpet_command[0])); i++)
+		if (!strcmp(argv[0], hpet_command[i].command)) {
+			argc--;
+			argv++;
+			fprintf(stderr, "-hpet: executing %s\n",
+				hpet_command[i].command);
+			hpet_command[i].func(argc, argv);
+			return 0;
+		}
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "do_hpet: command %s not implemented\n", argv[0]);
+
+	return -1;
+}
+
+void
+hpet_open_close(int argc, const char **argv)
+{
+	int	fd;
+
+	if (argc != 1) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: device-name\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
+	if (fd < 0)
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_open_close: open failed\n");
+	else
+		close(fd);
+
+	return;
+}
+
+void
+hpet_info(int argc, const char **argv)
+{
+}
+
+void
+hpet_poll(int argc, const char **argv)
+{
+	unsigned long		freq;
+	int			iterations, i, fd;
+	struct pollfd		pfd;
+	struct hpet_info	info;
+	struct timeval		stv, etv;
+	struct timezone		tz;
+	long			usec;
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: device-name freq iterations\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	freq = atoi(argv[1]);
+	iterations = atoi(argv[2]);
+
+	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
+
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: open of %s failed\n", argv[0]);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: failed to get info\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags);
+
+	if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: HPET_EPI failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll, HPET_IE_ON failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	pfd.fd = fd;
+	pfd.events = POLLIN;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
+		pfd.revents = 0;
+		gettimeofday(&stv, &tz);
+		if (poll(&pfd, 1, -1) < 0)
+			fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: poll failed\n");
+		else {
+			long 	data;
+
+			gettimeofday(&etv, &tz);
+			usec = stv.tv_sec * 1000000 + stv.tv_usec;
+			usec = (etv.tv_sec * 1000000 + etv.tv_usec) - usec;
+
+			fprintf(stderr,
+				"hpet_poll: expired time = 0x%lx\n", usec);
+
+			fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: revents = 0x%x\n",
+				pfd.revents);
+
+			if (read(fd, &data, sizeof(data)) != sizeof(data)) {
+				fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: read failed\n");
+			}
+			else
+				fprintf(stderr, "hpet_poll: data 0x%lx\n",
+					data);
+		}
+	}
+
+out:
+	close(fd);
+	return;
+}
+
+static int hpet_sigio_count;
+
+static void
+hpet_sigio(int val)
+{
+	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_sigio: called\n");
+	hpet_sigio_count++;
+}
+
+void
+hpet_fasync(int argc, const char **argv)
+{
+	unsigned long		freq;
+	int			iterations, i, fd, value;
+	sig_t			oldsig;
+	struct hpet_info	info;
+
+	hpet_sigio_count = 0;
+	fd = -1;
+
+	if ((oldsig = signal(SIGIO, hpet_sigio)) == SIG_ERR) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to set signal handler\n");
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: device-name freq iterations\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	fd = open(argv[0], O_RDONLY);
+
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to open %s\n", argv[0]);
+		return;
+	}
+
+
+	if ((fcntl(fd, F_SETOWN, getpid()) == 1) ||
+		((value = fcntl(fd, F_GETFL)) == 1) ||
+		(fcntl(fd, F_SETFL, value | O_ASYNC) == 1)) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: fcntl failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	freq = atoi(argv[1]);
+	iterations = atoi(argv[2]);
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IRQFREQ, freq) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_IRQFREQ failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_INFO, &info) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: failed to get info\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: info.hi_flags 0x%lx\n", info.hi_flags);
+
+	if (info.hi_flags && (ioctl(fd, HPET_EPI, 0) < 0)) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: HPET_EPI failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	if (ioctl(fd, HPET_IE_ON, 0) < 0) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync, HPET_IE_ON failed\n");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	for (i = 0; i < iterations; i++) {
+		(void) pause();
+		fprintf(stderr, "hpet_fasync: count = %d\n", hpet_sigio_count);
+	}
+
+out:
+	signal(SIGIO, oldsig);
+
+	if (fd >= 0)
+		close(fd);
+
+	return;
+}
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From d49129accc21ddb2e779d375dacafb612b1bd28d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:21:56 -0800
Subject: Documentation/laptop/: split txt and source files

Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt:
Expose example and tool source files in the Documentation/ directory in
their own files instead of being buried (almost hidden) in readme/txt files.
This should help to prevent bitrot.

This will make them more visible/usable to users who may need
to use them, to developers who may need to test with them, and
to anyone who would fix/update them if they were more visible.

Also, if any of these possibly should not be in the kernel tree at
all, it will be clearer that they are here and we can discuss if
they should be removed.

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/Makefile                |   2 +-
 Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX        |   2 +
 Documentation/laptops/Makefile        |   8 ++
 Documentation/laptops/dslm.c          | 166 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt | 170 +---------------------------------
 5 files changed, 178 insertions(+), 170 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/Makefile
 create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/dslm.c

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
index 78d74f6a3834..bde1ca1fbd2b 100644
--- a/Documentation/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
-	filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ networking/ \
+	filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \
 	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX b/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
index ee5692b26dd4..f1fc13d05f3e 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/00-INDEX
@@ -2,6 +2,8 @@
 	- This file
 acer-wmi.txt
 	- information on the Acer Laptop WMI Extras driver.
+dslm.c
+	- Simple Disk Sleep Monitor program
 laptop-mode.txt
 	- how to conserve battery power using laptop-mode.
 sony-laptop.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/Makefile b/Documentation/laptops/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5cb144af3c09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := dslm
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c b/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..72ff290c5fc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+/*
+ * dslm.c
+ * Simple Disk Sleep Monitor
+ *  by Bartek Kania
+ * Licenced under the GPL
+ */
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <sys/ioctl.h>
+#include <linux/hdreg.h>
+
+#ifdef DEBUG
+#define D(x) x
+#else
+#define D(x)
+#endif
+
+int endit = 0;
+
+/* Check if the disk is in powersave-mode
+ * Most of the code is stolen from hdparm.
+ * 1 = active, 0 = standby/sleep, -1 = unknown */
+static int check_powermode(int fd)
+{
+    unsigned char args[4] = {WIN_CHECKPOWERMODE1,0,0,0};
+    int state;
+
+    if (ioctl(fd, HDIO_DRIVE_CMD, &args)
+	&& (args[0] = WIN_CHECKPOWERMODE2) /* try again with 0x98 */
+	&& ioctl(fd, HDIO_DRIVE_CMD, &args)) {
+	if (errno != EIO || args[0] != 0 || args[1] != 0) {
+	    state = -1; /* "unknown"; */
+	} else
+	    state = 0; /* "sleeping"; */
+    } else {
+	state = (args[2] == 255) ? 1 : 0;
+    }
+    D(printf(" drive state is:  %d\n", state));
+
+    return state;
+}
+
+static char *state_name(int i)
+{
+    if (i == -1) return "unknown";
+    if (i == 0) return "sleeping";
+    if (i == 1) return "active";
+
+    return "internal error";
+}
+
+static char *myctime(time_t time)
+{
+    char *ts = ctime(&time);
+    ts[strlen(ts) - 1] = 0;
+
+    return ts;
+}
+
+static void measure(int fd)
+{
+    time_t start_time;
+    int last_state;
+    time_t last_time;
+    int curr_state;
+    time_t curr_time = 0;
+    time_t time_diff;
+    time_t active_time = 0;
+    time_t sleep_time = 0;
+    time_t unknown_time = 0;
+    time_t total_time = 0;
+    int changes = 0;
+    float tmp;
+
+    printf("Starting measurements\n");
+
+    last_state = check_powermode(fd);
+    start_time = last_time = time(0);
+    printf("  System is in state %s\n\n", state_name(last_state));
+
+    while(!endit) {
+	sleep(1);
+	curr_state = check_powermode(fd);
+
+	if (curr_state != last_state || endit) {
+	    changes++;
+	    curr_time = time(0);
+	    time_diff = curr_time - last_time;
+
+	    if (last_state == 1) active_time += time_diff;
+	    else if (last_state == 0) sleep_time += time_diff;
+	    else unknown_time += time_diff;
+
+	    last_state = curr_state;
+	    last_time = curr_time;
+
+	    printf("%s: State-change to %s\n", myctime(curr_time),
+		   state_name(curr_state));
+	}
+    }
+    changes--; /* Compensate for SIGINT */
+
+    total_time = time(0) - start_time;
+    printf("\nTotal running time:  %lus\n", curr_time - start_time);
+    printf(" State changed %d times\n", changes);
+
+    tmp = (float)sleep_time / (float)total_time * 100;
+    printf(" Time in sleep state:   %lus (%.2f%%)\n", sleep_time, tmp);
+    tmp = (float)active_time / (float)total_time * 100;
+    printf(" Time in active state:  %lus (%.2f%%)\n", active_time, tmp);
+    tmp = (float)unknown_time / (float)total_time * 100;
+    printf(" Time in unknown state: %lus (%.2f%%)\n", unknown_time, tmp);
+}
+
+static void ender(int s)
+{
+    endit = 1;
+}
+
+static void usage(void)
+{
+    puts("usage: dslm [-w <time>] <disk>");
+    exit(0);
+}
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+    int fd;
+    char *disk = 0;
+    int settle_time = 60;
+
+    /* Parse the simple command-line */
+    if (argc == 2)
+	disk = argv[1];
+    else if (argc == 4) {
+	settle_time = atoi(argv[2]);
+	disk = argv[3];
+    } else
+	usage();
+
+    if (!(fd = open(disk, O_RDONLY|O_NONBLOCK))) {
+	printf("Can't open %s, because: %s\n", disk, strerror(errno));
+	exit(-1);
+    }
+
+    if (settle_time) {
+	printf("Waiting %d seconds for the system to settle down to "
+	       "'normal'\n", settle_time);
+	sleep(settle_time);
+    } else
+	puts("Not waiting for system to settle down");
+
+    signal(SIGINT, ender);
+
+    measure(fd);
+
+    close(fd);
+
+    return 0;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
index eeedee11c8c2..2c3c35093023 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
@@ -779,172 +779,4 @@ Monitoring tool
 ---------------
 
 Bartek Kania submitted this, it can be used to measure how much time your disk
-spends spun up/down.
-
----------------------------dslm.c BEGIN-----------------------------------------
-/*
- * Simple Disk Sleep Monitor
- *  by Bartek Kania
- * Licenced under the GPL
- */
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <time.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <signal.h>
-#include <sys/ioctl.h>
-#include <linux/hdreg.h>
-
-#ifdef DEBUG
-#define D(x) x
-#else
-#define D(x)
-#endif
-
-int endit = 0;
-
-/* Check if the disk is in powersave-mode
- * Most of the code is stolen from hdparm.
- * 1 = active, 0 = standby/sleep, -1 = unknown */
-int check_powermode(int fd)
-{
-    unsigned char args[4] = {WIN_CHECKPOWERMODE1,0,0,0};
-    int state;
-
-    if (ioctl(fd, HDIO_DRIVE_CMD, &args)
-	&& (args[0] = WIN_CHECKPOWERMODE2) /* try again with 0x98 */
-	&& ioctl(fd, HDIO_DRIVE_CMD, &args)) {
-	if (errno != EIO || args[0] != 0 || args[1] != 0) {
-	    state = -1; /* "unknown"; */
-	} else
-	    state = 0; /* "sleeping"; */
-    } else {
-	state = (args[2] == 255) ? 1 : 0;
-    }
-    D(printf(" drive state is:  %d\n", state));
-
-    return state;
-}
-
-char *state_name(int i)
-{
-    if (i == -1) return "unknown";
-    if (i == 0) return "sleeping";
-    if (i == 1) return "active";
-
-    return "internal error";
-}
-
-char *myctime(time_t time)
-{
-    char *ts = ctime(&time);
-    ts[strlen(ts) - 1] = 0;
-
-    return ts;
-}
-
-void measure(int fd)
-{
-    time_t start_time;
-    int last_state;
-    time_t last_time;
-    int curr_state;
-    time_t curr_time = 0;
-    time_t time_diff;
-    time_t active_time = 0;
-    time_t sleep_time = 0;
-    time_t unknown_time = 0;
-    time_t total_time = 0;
-    int changes = 0;
-    float tmp;
-
-    printf("Starting measurements\n");
-
-    last_state = check_powermode(fd);
-    start_time = last_time = time(0);
-    printf("  System is in state %s\n\n", state_name(last_state));
-
-    while(!endit) {
-	sleep(1);
-	curr_state = check_powermode(fd);
-
-	if (curr_state != last_state || endit) {
-	    changes++;
-	    curr_time = time(0);
-	    time_diff = curr_time - last_time;
-
-	    if (last_state == 1) active_time += time_diff;
-	    else if (last_state == 0) sleep_time += time_diff;
-	    else unknown_time += time_diff;
-
-	    last_state = curr_state;
-	    last_time = curr_time;
-
-	    printf("%s: State-change to %s\n", myctime(curr_time),
-		   state_name(curr_state));
-	}
-    }
-    changes--; /* Compensate for SIGINT */
-
-    total_time = time(0) - start_time;
-    printf("\nTotal running time:  %lus\n", curr_time - start_time);
-    printf(" State changed %d times\n", changes);
-
-    tmp = (float)sleep_time / (float)total_time * 100;
-    printf(" Time in sleep state:   %lus (%.2f%%)\n", sleep_time, tmp);
-    tmp = (float)active_time / (float)total_time * 100;
-    printf(" Time in active state:  %lus (%.2f%%)\n", active_time, tmp);
-    tmp = (float)unknown_time / (float)total_time * 100;
-    printf(" Time in unknown state: %lus (%.2f%%)\n", unknown_time, tmp);
-}
-
-void ender(int s)
-{
-    endit = 1;
-}
-
-void usage()
-{
-    puts("usage: dslm [-w <time>] <disk>");
-    exit(0);
-}
-
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
-    int fd;
-    char *disk = 0;
-    int settle_time = 60;
-
-    /* Parse the simple command-line */
-    if (argc == 2)
-	disk = argv[1];
-    else if (argc == 4) {
-	settle_time = atoi(argv[2]);
-	disk = argv[3];
-    } else
-	usage();
-
-    if (!(fd = open(disk, O_RDONLY|O_NONBLOCK))) {
-	printf("Can't open %s, because: %s\n", disk, strerror(errno));
-	exit(-1);
-    }
-
-    if (settle_time) {
-	printf("Waiting %d seconds for the system to settle down to "
-	       "'normal'\n", settle_time);
-	sleep(settle_time);
-    } else
-	puts("Not waiting for system to settle down");
-
-    signal(SIGINT, ender);
-
-    measure(fd);
-
-    close(fd);
-
-    return 0;
-}
----------------------------dslm.c END-------------------------------------------
+spends spun up/down.  See Documentation/laptops/dslm.c
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1e0051ae48a253685e4309256f9c1ec2bdb74b5d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:21:57 -0800
Subject: Documentation/fs/: split txt and source files

Make dnotify_test.c source file and add it to Makefile so that
bitrot can be prevented.

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Cc: Stephen Rothwell <sfr@canb.auug.org.au>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/Makefile                   |  2 +-
 Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX       |  2 ++
 Documentation/filesystems/Makefile       |  8 +++++++
 Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.txt    | 39 ++++----------------------------
 Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c | 34 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 5 files changed, 50 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/Makefile
 create mode 100644 Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/Makefile b/Documentation/Makefile
index bde1ca1fbd2b..6fc7ea1d1f9d 100644
--- a/Documentation/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/Makefile
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
 obj-m := DocBook/ accounting/ auxdisplay/ connector/ \
-	filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \
+	filesystems/ filesystems/configfs/ ia64/ laptops/ networking/ \
 	pcmcia/ spi/ timers/ video4linux/ vm/ watchdog/src/
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
index 5139b8c9d5af..3bae418c6ad3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/00-INDEX
@@ -32,6 +32,8 @@ dlmfs.txt
 	- info on the userspace interface to the OCFS2 DLM.
 dnotify.txt
 	- info about directory notification in Linux.
+dnotify_test.c
+	- example program for dnotify
 ecryptfs.txt
 	- docs on eCryptfs: stacked cryptographic filesystem for Linux.
 exofs.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Makefile b/Documentation/filesystems/Makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a5dd114da14f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+# kbuild trick to avoid linker error. Can be omitted if a module is built.
+obj- := dummy.o
+
+# List of programs to build
+hostprogs-y := dnotify_test
+
+# Tell kbuild to always build the programs
+always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.txt
index 9f5d338ddbb8..6baf88f46859 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify.txt
@@ -62,38 +62,9 @@ disabled, fcntl(fd, F_NOTIFY, ...) will return -EINVAL.
 
 Example
 -------
+See Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c for an example.
 
-	#define _GNU_SOURCE	/* needed to get the defines */
-	#include <fcntl.h>	/* in glibc 2.2 this has the needed
-					   values defined */
-	#include <signal.h>
-	#include <stdio.h>
-	#include <unistd.h>
-
-	static volatile int event_fd;
-
-	static void handler(int sig, siginfo_t *si, void *data)
-	{
-		event_fd = si->si_fd;
-	}
-
-	int main(void)
-	{
-		struct sigaction act;
-		int fd;
-
-		act.sa_sigaction = handler;
-		sigemptyset(&act.sa_mask);
-		act.sa_flags = SA_SIGINFO;
-		sigaction(SIGRTMIN + 1, &act, NULL);
-
-		fd = open(".", O_RDONLY);
-		fcntl(fd, F_SETSIG, SIGRTMIN + 1);
-		fcntl(fd, F_NOTIFY, DN_MODIFY|DN_CREATE|DN_MULTISHOT);
-		/* we will now be notified if any of the files
-		   in "." is modified or new files are created */
-		while (1) {
-			pause();
-			printf("Got event on fd=%d\n", event_fd);
-		}
-	}
+NOTE
+----
+Beginning with Linux 2.6.13, dnotify has been replaced by inotify.
+See Documentation/filesystems/inotify.txt for more information on it.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8b37b4a1e18d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/dnotify_test.c
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+#define _GNU_SOURCE	/* needed to get the defines */
+#include <fcntl.h>	/* in glibc 2.2 this has the needed
+				   values defined */
+#include <signal.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+static volatile int event_fd;
+
+static void handler(int sig, siginfo_t *si, void *data)
+{
+	event_fd = si->si_fd;
+}
+
+int main(void)
+{
+	struct sigaction act;
+	int fd;
+
+	act.sa_sigaction = handler;
+	sigemptyset(&act.sa_mask);
+	act.sa_flags = SA_SIGINFO;
+	sigaction(SIGRTMIN + 1, &act, NULL);
+
+	fd = open(".", O_RDONLY);
+	fcntl(fd, F_SETSIG, SIGRTMIN + 1);
+	fcntl(fd, F_NOTIFY, DN_MODIFY|DN_CREATE|DN_MULTISHOT);
+	/* we will now be notified if any of the files
+	   in "." is modified or new files are created */
+	while (1) {
+		pause();
+		printf("Got event on fd=%d\n", event_fd);
+	}
+}
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 70bace8c1edefa700c7f7af522c5374ef63860ae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:21:58 -0800
Subject: Documentation/vm/: split txt and source files

Documentation/vm/:
Expose example and tool source files in the Documentation/ directory in
their own files instead of being buried (almost hidden) in readme/txt files.
This should help to prevent bitrot.

This will make them more visible/usable to users who may need
to use them, to developers who may need to test with them, and
to anyone who would fix/update them if they were more visible.

Also, if any of these possibly should not be in the kernel tree at
all, it will be clearer that they are here and we can discuss if
they should be removed.

Also build the recently-added map_hugetlb.c.
Make several functions static to prevent linker warnings.

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Acked-by: Eric B Munson <ebmunson@us.ibm.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/vm/00-INDEX        |  16 +++-
 Documentation/vm/Makefile        |   2 +-
 Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c |  91 +++++++++++++++++++++
 Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c  |  98 +++++++++++++++++++++++
 Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt | 169 +--------------------------------------
 Documentation/vm/map_hugetlb.c   |   6 +-
 6 files changed, 209 insertions(+), 173 deletions(-)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
 create mode 100644 Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX
index e57d6a9dd32b..dca82d7c83d8 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/vm/00-INDEX
@@ -4,23 +4,35 @@ active_mm.txt
 	- An explanation from Linus about tsk->active_mm vs tsk->mm.
 balance
 	- various information on memory balancing.
+hugepage-mmap.c
+	- Example app using huge page memory with the mmap system call.
+hugepage-shm.c
+	- Example app using huge page memory with Sys V shared memory system calls.
 hugetlbpage.txt
 	- a brief summary of hugetlbpage support in the Linux kernel.
+hwpoison.txt
+	- explains what hwpoison is
 ksm.txt
 	- how to use the Kernel Samepage Merging feature.
 locking
 	- info on how locking and synchronization is done in the Linux vm code.
+map_hugetlb.c
+	- an example program that uses the MAP_HUGETLB mmap flag.
 numa
 	- information about NUMA specific code in the Linux vm.
 numa_memory_policy.txt
 	- documentation of concepts and APIs of the 2.6 memory policy support.
 overcommit-accounting
 	- description of the Linux kernels overcommit handling modes.
+page-types.c
+	- Tool for querying page flags
 page_migration
 	- description of page migration in NUMA systems.
+pagemap.txt
+	- pagemap, from the userspace perspective
 slabinfo.c
 	- source code for a tool to get reports about slabs.
 slub.txt
 	- a short users guide for SLUB.
-map_hugetlb.c
-	- an example program that uses the MAP_HUGETLB mmap flag.
+unevictable-lru.txt
+	- Unevictable LRU infrastructure
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/Makefile b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
index 5bd269b3731a..9dcff328b964 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/Makefile
+++ b/Documentation/vm/Makefile
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 obj- := dummy.o
 
 # List of programs to build
-hostprogs-y := slabinfo page-types
+hostprogs-y := slabinfo page-types hugepage-mmap hugepage-shm map_hugetlb
 
 # Tell kbuild to always build the programs
 always := $(hostprogs-y)
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c b/Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..db0dd9a33d54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+ * hugepage-mmap:
+ *
+ * Example of using huge page memory in a user application using the mmap
+ * system call.  Before running this application, make sure that the
+ * administrator has mounted the hugetlbfs filesystem (on some directory
+ * like /mnt) using the command mount -t hugetlbfs nodev /mnt. In this
+ * example, the app is requesting memory of size 256MB that is backed by
+ * huge pages.
+ *
+ * For the ia64 architecture, the Linux kernel reserves Region number 4 for
+ * huge pages.  That means that if one requires a fixed address, a huge page
+ * aligned address starting with 0x800000... will be required.  If a fixed
+ * address is not required, the kernel will select an address in the proper
+ * range.
+ * Other architectures, such as ppc64, i386 or x86_64 are not so constrained.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+
+#define FILE_NAME "/mnt/hugepagefile"
+#define LENGTH (256UL*1024*1024)
+#define PROTECTION (PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE)
+
+/* Only ia64 requires this */
+#ifdef __ia64__
+#define ADDR (void *)(0x8000000000000000UL)
+#define FLAGS (MAP_SHARED | MAP_FIXED)
+#else
+#define ADDR (void *)(0x0UL)
+#define FLAGS (MAP_SHARED)
+#endif
+
+static void check_bytes(char *addr)
+{
+	printf("First hex is %x\n", *((unsigned int *)addr));
+}
+
+static void write_bytes(char *addr)
+{
+	unsigned long i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
+		*(addr + i) = (char)i;
+}
+
+static void read_bytes(char *addr)
+{
+	unsigned long i;
+
+	check_bytes(addr);
+	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
+		if (*(addr + i) != (char)i) {
+			printf("Mismatch at %lu\n", i);
+			break;
+		}
+}
+
+int main(void)
+{
+	void *addr;
+	int fd;
+
+	fd = open(FILE_NAME, O_CREAT | O_RDWR, 0755);
+	if (fd < 0) {
+		perror("Open failed");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	addr = mmap(ADDR, LENGTH, PROTECTION, FLAGS, fd, 0);
+	if (addr == MAP_FAILED) {
+		perror("mmap");
+		unlink(FILE_NAME);
+		exit(1);
+	}
+
+	printf("Returned address is %p\n", addr);
+	check_bytes(addr);
+	write_bytes(addr);
+	read_bytes(addr);
+
+	munmap(addr, LENGTH);
+	close(fd);
+	unlink(FILE_NAME);
+
+	return 0;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c b/Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..07956d8592c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*
+ * hugepage-shm:
+ *
+ * Example of using huge page memory in a user application using Sys V shared
+ * memory system calls.  In this example the app is requesting 256MB of
+ * memory that is backed by huge pages.  The application uses the flag
+ * SHM_HUGETLB in the shmget system call to inform the kernel that it is
+ * requesting huge pages.
+ *
+ * For the ia64 architecture, the Linux kernel reserves Region number 4 for
+ * huge pages.  That means that if one requires a fixed address, a huge page
+ * aligned address starting with 0x800000... will be required.  If a fixed
+ * address is not required, the kernel will select an address in the proper
+ * range.
+ * Other architectures, such as ppc64, i386 or x86_64 are not so constrained.
+ *
+ * Note: The default shared memory limit is quite low on many kernels,
+ * you may need to increase it via:
+ *
+ * echo 268435456 > /proc/sys/kernel/shmmax
+ *
+ * This will increase the maximum size per shared memory segment to 256MB.
+ * The other limit that you will hit eventually is shmall which is the
+ * total amount of shared memory in pages. To set it to 16GB on a system
+ * with a 4kB pagesize do:
+ *
+ * echo 4194304 > /proc/sys/kernel/shmall
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/ipc.h>
+#include <sys/shm.h>
+#include <sys/mman.h>
+
+#ifndef SHM_HUGETLB
+#define SHM_HUGETLB 04000
+#endif
+
+#define LENGTH (256UL*1024*1024)
+
+#define dprintf(x)  printf(x)
+
+/* Only ia64 requires this */
+#ifdef __ia64__
+#define ADDR (void *)(0x8000000000000000UL)
+#define SHMAT_FLAGS (SHM_RND)
+#else
+#define ADDR (void *)(0x0UL)
+#define SHMAT_FLAGS (0)
+#endif
+
+int main(void)
+{
+	int shmid;
+	unsigned long i;
+	char *shmaddr;
+
+	if ((shmid = shmget(2, LENGTH,
+			    SHM_HUGETLB | IPC_CREAT | SHM_R | SHM_W)) < 0) {
+		perror("shmget");
+		exit(1);
+	}
+	printf("shmid: 0x%x\n", shmid);
+
+	shmaddr = shmat(shmid, ADDR, SHMAT_FLAGS);
+	if (shmaddr == (char *)-1) {
+		perror("Shared memory attach failure");
+		shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+		exit(2);
+	}
+	printf("shmaddr: %p\n", shmaddr);
+
+	dprintf("Starting the writes:\n");
+	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++) {
+		shmaddr[i] = (char)(i);
+		if (!(i % (1024 * 1024)))
+			dprintf(".");
+	}
+	dprintf("\n");
+
+	dprintf("Starting the Check...");
+	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
+		if (shmaddr[i] != (char)i)
+			printf("\nIndex %lu mismatched\n", i);
+	dprintf("Done.\n");
+
+	if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0) {
+		perror("Detach failure");
+		shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+		exit(3);
+	}
+
+	shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
+
+	return 0;
+}
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
index bc31636973e3..457634c1e03e 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
@@ -299,176 +299,11 @@ map_hugetlb.c.
 *******************************************************************
 
 /*
- * Example of using huge page memory in a user application using Sys V shared
- * memory system calls.  In this example the app is requesting 256MB of
- * memory that is backed by huge pages.  The application uses the flag
- * SHM_HUGETLB in the shmget system call to inform the kernel that it is
- * requesting huge pages.
- *
- * For the ia64 architecture, the Linux kernel reserves Region number 4 for
- * huge pages.  That means that if one requires a fixed address, a huge page
- * aligned address starting with 0x800000... will be required.  If a fixed
- * address is not required, the kernel will select an address in the proper
- * range.
- * Other architectures, such as ppc64, i386 or x86_64 are not so constrained.
- *
- * Note: The default shared memory limit is quite low on many kernels,
- * you may need to increase it via:
- *
- * echo 268435456 > /proc/sys/kernel/shmmax
- *
- * This will increase the maximum size per shared memory segment to 256MB.
- * The other limit that you will hit eventually is shmall which is the
- * total amount of shared memory in pages. To set it to 16GB on a system
- * with a 4kB pagesize do:
- *
- * echo 4194304 > /proc/sys/kernel/shmall
+ * hugepage-shm:  see Documentation/vm/hugepage-shm.c
  */
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/ipc.h>
-#include <sys/shm.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-
-#ifndef SHM_HUGETLB
-#define SHM_HUGETLB 04000
-#endif
-
-#define LENGTH (256UL*1024*1024)
-
-#define dprintf(x)  printf(x)
-
-#define ADDR (void *)(0x0UL)	/* let kernel choose address */
-#define SHMAT_FLAGS (0)
-
-int main(void)
-{
-	int shmid;
-	unsigned long i;
-	char *shmaddr;
-
-	if ((shmid = shmget(2, LENGTH,
-			    SHM_HUGETLB | IPC_CREAT | SHM_R | SHM_W)) < 0) {
-		perror("shmget");
-		exit(1);
-	}
-	printf("shmid: 0x%x\n", shmid);
-
-	shmaddr = shmat(shmid, ADDR, SHMAT_FLAGS);
-	if (shmaddr == (char *)-1) {
-		perror("Shared memory attach failure");
-		shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
-		exit(2);
-	}
-	printf("shmaddr: %p\n", shmaddr);
-
-	dprintf("Starting the writes:\n");
-	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++) {
-		shmaddr[i] = (char)(i);
-		if (!(i % (1024 * 1024)))
-			dprintf(".");
-	}
-	dprintf("\n");
-
-	dprintf("Starting the Check...");
-	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
-		if (shmaddr[i] != (char)i)
-			printf("\nIndex %lu mismatched\n", i);
-	dprintf("Done.\n");
-
-	if (shmdt((const void *)shmaddr) != 0) {
-		perror("Detach failure");
-		shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
-		exit(3);
-	}
-
-	shmctl(shmid, IPC_RMID, NULL);
-
-	return 0;
-}
 
 *******************************************************************
 
 /*
- * Example of using huge page memory in a user application using the mmap
- * system call.  Before running this application, make sure that the
- * administrator has mounted the hugetlbfs filesystem (on some directory
- * like /mnt) using the command mount -t hugetlbfs nodev /mnt. In this
- * example, the app is requesting memory of size 256MB that is backed by
- * huge pages.
- *
- * For the ia64 architecture, the Linux kernel reserves Region number 4 for
- * huge pages.  That means that if one requires a fixed address, a huge page
- * aligned address starting with 0x800000... will be required.  If a fixed
- * address is not required, the kernel will select an address in the proper
- * range.
- * Other architectures, such as ppc64, i386 or x86_64 are not so constrained.
+ * hugepage-mmap:  see Documentation/vm/hugepage-mmap.c
  */
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-
-#define FILE_NAME "/mnt/hugepagefile"
-#define LENGTH (256UL*1024*1024)
-#define PROTECTION (PROT_READ | PROT_WRITE)
-
-#define ADDR (void *)(0x0UL)	/* let kernel choose address */
-#define FLAGS (MAP_SHARED)
-
-void check_bytes(char *addr)
-{
-	printf("First hex is %x\n", *((unsigned int *)addr));
-}
-
-void write_bytes(char *addr)
-{
-	unsigned long i;
-
-	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
-		*(addr + i) = (char)i;
-}
-
-void read_bytes(char *addr)
-{
-	unsigned long i;
-
-	check_bytes(addr);
-	for (i = 0; i < LENGTH; i++)
-		if (*(addr + i) != (char)i) {
-			printf("Mismatch at %lu\n", i);
-			break;
-		}
-}
-
-int main(void)
-{
-	void *addr;
-	int fd;
-
-	fd = open(FILE_NAME, O_CREAT | O_RDWR, 0755);
-	if (fd < 0) {
-		perror("Open failed");
-		exit(1);
-	}
-
-	addr = mmap(ADDR, LENGTH, PROTECTION, FLAGS, fd, 0);
-	if (addr == MAP_FAILED) {
-		perror("mmap");
-		unlink(FILE_NAME);
-		exit(1);
-	}
-
-	printf("Returned address is %p\n", addr);
-	check_bytes(addr);
-	write_bytes(addr);
-	read_bytes(addr);
-
-	munmap(addr, LENGTH);
-	close(fd);
-	unlink(FILE_NAME);
-
-	return 0;
-}
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/map_hugetlb.c b/Documentation/vm/map_hugetlb.c
index e2bdae37f499..9969c7d9f985 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/map_hugetlb.c
+++ b/Documentation/vm/map_hugetlb.c
@@ -31,12 +31,12 @@
 #define FLAGS (MAP_PRIVATE | MAP_ANONYMOUS | MAP_HUGETLB)
 #endif
 
-void check_bytes(char *addr)
+static void check_bytes(char *addr)
 {
 	printf("First hex is %x\n", *((unsigned int *)addr));
 }
 
-void write_bytes(char *addr)
+static void write_bytes(char *addr)
 {
 	unsigned long i;
 
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ void write_bytes(char *addr)
 		*(addr + i) = (char)i;
 }
 
-void read_bytes(char *addr)
+static void read_bytes(char *addr)
 {
 	unsigned long i;
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b5247c854ed1cef30e0c7f4c6dfbf3c9d83bcf8e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:21:59 -0800
Subject: Documentation/SubmitChecklist: add rule #1

Add header file requirements.  Compliments of Stephen Rothwell.

Stephen calls this Rule #1, so I put it there, but I didn't want to demote
any of the others in the list, so I made one of them number 2b.

Signed-off-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Cc: Stephen Rothwell <sfr@canb.auug.org.au>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/SubmitChecklist | 8 ++++++--
 1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
index 1053a56be3b1..8916ca48bc95 100644
--- a/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
+++ b/Documentation/SubmitChecklist
@@ -9,10 +9,14 @@ Documentation/SubmittingPatches and elsewhere regarding submitting Linux
 kernel patches.
 
 
-1: Builds cleanly with applicable or modified CONFIG options =y, =m, and
+1: If you use a facility then #include the file that defines/declares
+   that facility.  Don't depend on other header files pulling in ones
+   that you use.
+
+2: Builds cleanly with applicable or modified CONFIG options =y, =m, and
    =n.  No gcc warnings/errors, no linker warnings/errors.
 
-2: Passes allnoconfig, allmodconfig
+2b: Passes allnoconfig, allmodconfig
 
 3: Builds on multiple CPU architectures by using local cross-compile tools
    or some other build farm.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b6b6e2b112cafcd63bdbebbffe97279f41e5ca62 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz <bzolnier@gmail.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:00 -0800
Subject: Documentation: remove obsolete voyager.txt file

x86/Voyager support has been removed a year ago.

Signed-off-by: Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz <bzolnier@gmail.com>
Inspired-by: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/voyager.txt | 95 -----------------------------------------------
 1 file changed, 95 deletions(-)
 delete mode 100644 Documentation/voyager.txt

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/voyager.txt b/Documentation/voyager.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 2749af552cdf..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/voyager.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-Running Linux on the Voyager Architecture
-=========================================
-
-For full details and current project status, see
-
-http://www.hansenpartnership.com/voyager
-
-The voyager architecture was designed by NCR in the mid 80s to be a
-fully SMP capable RAS computing architecture built around intel's 486
-chip set.  The voyager came in three levels of architectural
-sophistication: 3,4 and 5 --- 1 and 2 never made it out of prototype.
-The linux patches support only the Level 5 voyager architecture (any
-machine class 3435 and above).
-
-The Voyager Architecture
-------------------------
-
-Voyager machines consist of a Baseboard with a 386 diagnostic
-processor, a Power Supply Interface (PSI) a Primary and possibly
-Secondary Microchannel bus and between 2 and 20 voyager slots.  The
-voyager slots can be populated with memory and cpu cards (up to 4GB
-memory and from 1 486 to 32 Pentium Pro processors).  Internally, the
-voyager has a dual arbitrated system bus and a configuration and test
-bus (CAT).  The voyager bus speed is 40MHz.  Therefore (since all
-voyager cards are dual ported for each system bus) the maximum
-transfer rate is 320Mb/s but only if you have your slot configuration
-tuned (only memory cards can communicate with both busses at once, CPU
-cards utilise them one at a time).
-
-Voyager SMP
------------
-
-Since voyager was the first intel based SMP system, it is slightly
-more primitive than the Intel IO-APIC approach to SMP.  Voyager allows
-arbitrary interrupt routing (including processor affinity routing) of
-all 16 PC type interrupts.  However it does this by using a modified
-5259 master/slave chip set instead of an APIC bus.  Additionally,
-voyager supports Cross Processor Interrupts (CPI) equivalent to the
-APIC IPIs.  There are two routed voyager interrupt lines provided to
-each slot.
-
-Processor Cards
----------------
-
-These come in single, dyadic and quad configurations (the quads are
-problematic--see later).  The maximum configuration is 8 quad cards
-for 32 way SMP.
-
-Quad Processors
----------------
-
-Because voyager only supplies two interrupt lines to each Processor
-card, the Quad processors have to be configured (and Bootstrapped) in
-as a pair of Master/Slave processors.
-
-In fact, most Quad cards only accept one VIC interrupt line, so they
-have one interrupt handling processor (called the VIC extended
-processor) and three non-interrupt handling processors.
-
-Current Status
---------------
-
-The System will boot on Mono, Dyad and Quad cards.  There was
-originally a Quad boot problem which has been fixed by proper gdt
-alignment in the initial boot loader.  If you still cannot get your
-voyager system to boot, email me at:
-
-<J.E.J.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
-
-
-The Quad cards now support using the separate Quad CPI vectors instead
-of going through the VIC mailbox system.
-
-The Level 4 architecture (3430 and 3360 Machines) should also work
-fine.
-
-Dump Switch
------------
-
-The voyager dump switch sends out a broadcast NMI which the voyager
-code intercepts and does a task dump.
-
-Power Switch
-------------
-
-The front panel power switch is intercepted by the kernel and should
-cause a system shutdown and power off.
-
-A Note About Mixed CPU Systems
-------------------------------
-
-Linux isn't designed to handle mixed CPU systems very well.  In order
-to get everything going you *must* make sure that your lowest
-capability CPU is used for booting.  Also, mixing CPU classes
-(e.g. 486 and 586) is really not going to work very well at all.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 5ce9f07bf1bed9a1f9886373ad0b149294f84c25 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:02 -0800
Subject: Documentation/email-clients.txt: update gmail information

Gmail web gui does not work for sending patches now even with firefox
"view source with" extension.  It will use windows style line breaks to
wrap lines automatically when sening email.

Rewrite the gmail web gui part of email client documentation.

Signed-off-by: Dave Young <hidave.darkstar@gmail.com>
Cc: Randy Dunlap <rdunlap@xenotime.net>
Cc: Martin Bligh <mbligh@mbligh.org>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/email-clients.txt | 30 +++++++++---------------------
 1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 21 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/email-clients.txt
index a618efab7b15..945ff3fda433 100644
--- a/Documentation/email-clients.txt
+++ b/Documentation/email-clients.txt
@@ -216,26 +216,14 @@ Works.  Use "Insert file..." or external editor.
 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
 Gmail (Web GUI)
 
-If you just have to use Gmail to send patches, it CAN be made to work.  It
-requires a bit of external help, though.
-
-The first problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces.  This will
-totally break your patches.  To prevent this, you have to use a different
-editor.  There is a firefox extension called "ViewSourceWith"
-(https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/394) which allows you to
-edit any text box in the editor of your choice.  Configure it to launch
-your favorite editor.  When you want to send a patch, use this technique.
-Once you have crafted your messsage + patch, save and exit the editor,
-which should reload the Gmail edit box.  GMAIL WILL PRESERVE THE TABS.
-Hoorah.  Apparently you can cut-n-paste literal tabs, but Gmail will
-convert those to spaces upon sending!
-
-The second problem is that Gmail converts tabs to spaces on replies.  If
-you reply to a patch, don't expect to be able to apply it as a patch.
-
-The last problem is that Gmail will base64-encode any message that has a
-non-ASCII character.  That includes things like European names.  Be aware.
-
-Gmail is not convenient for lkml patches, but CAN be made to work.
+Does not work for sending patches.
+
+Gmail web client converts tabs to spaces automatically.
+
+At the same time it wraps lines every 78 chars with CRLF style line breaks
+although tab2space problem can be solved with external editor.
+
+Another problem is that Gmail will base64-encode any message that has a
+non-ASCII character. That includes things like European names.
 
                                 ###
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 2468c7234b366eeb799ee0648cb58f9cba394a54 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:03 -0800
Subject: cgroup: introduce cancel_attach()

Add cancel_attach() operation to struct cgroup_subsys.  cancel_attach()
can be used when can_attach() operation prepares something for the subsys,
but we should rollback what can_attach() operation has prepared if attach
task fails after we've succeeded in can_attach().

Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Acked-by: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 13 ++++++++++++-
 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index 0b33bfe7dde9..d45082653e3d 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -536,10 +536,21 @@ returns an error, this will abort the attach operation.  If a NULL
 task is passed, then a successful result indicates that *any*
 unspecified task can be moved into the cgroup. Note that this isn't
 called on a fork. If this method returns 0 (success) then this should
-remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex. If threadgroup is
+remain valid while the caller holds cgroup_mutex and it is ensured that either
+attach() or cancel_attach() will be called in future. If threadgroup is
 true, then a successful result indicates that all threads in the given
 thread's threadgroup can be moved together.
 
+void cancel_attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
+	       struct task_struct *task, bool threadgroup)
+(cgroup_mutex held by caller)
+
+Called when a task attach operation has failed after can_attach() has succeeded.
+A subsystem whose can_attach() has some side-effects should provide this
+function, so that the subsytem can implement a rollback. If not, not necessary.
+This will be called only about subsystems whose can_attach() operation have
+succeeded.
+
 void attach(struct cgroup_subsys *ss, struct cgroup *cgrp,
 	    struct cgroup *old_cgrp, struct task_struct *task,
 	    bool threadgroup)
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From e6a1105ba08b265023dd71a4174fb4a29ebc7083 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ben Blum <bblum@andrew.cmu.edu>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:09 -0800
Subject: cgroups: subsystem module loading interface

Add interface between cgroups subsystem management and module loading

This patch implements rudimentary module-loading support for cgroups -
namely, a cgroup_load_subsys (similar to cgroup_init_subsys) for use as a
module initcall, and a struct module pointer in struct cgroup_subsys.

Several functions that might be wanted by modules have had EXPORT_SYMBOL
added to them, but it's unclear exactly which functions want it and which
won't.

Signed-off-by: Ben Blum <bblum@andrew.cmu.edu>
Acked-by: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net>
Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Lai Jiangshan <laijs@cn.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index d45082653e3d..ae8a037a761e 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -488,6 +488,10 @@ Each subsystem should:
 - add an entry in linux/cgroup_subsys.h
 - define a cgroup_subsys object called <name>_subsys
 
+If a subsystem can be compiled as a module, it should also have in its
+module initcall a call to cgroup_load_subsys(&its_subsys_struct). It
+should also set its_subsys.module = THIS_MODULE in its .c file.
+
 Each subsystem may export the following methods. The only mandatory
 methods are create/destroy. Any others that are null are presumed to
 be successful no-ops.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From cf5d5941fda647fe3d2f2d00cf9e0245236a5f08 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Ben Blum <bblum@andrew.cmu.edu>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:09 -0800
Subject: cgroups: subsystem module unloading

Provides support for unloading modular subsystems.

This patch adds a new function cgroup_unload_subsys which is to be used
for removing a loaded subsystem during module deletion.  Reference
counting of the subsystems' modules is moved from once (at load time) to
once per attached hierarchy (in parse_cgroupfs_options and
rebind_subsystems) (i.e., 0 or 1).

Signed-off-by: Ben Blum <bblum@andrew.cmu.edu>
Acked-by: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net>
Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Lai Jiangshan <laijs@cn.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 5 +++--
 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index ae8a037a761e..764007b63921 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -489,8 +489,9 @@ Each subsystem should:
 - define a cgroup_subsys object called <name>_subsys
 
 If a subsystem can be compiled as a module, it should also have in its
-module initcall a call to cgroup_load_subsys(&its_subsys_struct). It
-should also set its_subsys.module = THIS_MODULE in its .c file.
+module initcall a call to cgroup_load_subsys(), and in its exitcall a
+call to cgroup_unload_subsys(). It should also set its_subsys.module =
+THIS_MODULE in its .c file.
 
 Each subsystem may export the following methods. The only mandatory
 methods are create/destroy. Any others that are null are presumed to
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 8ca712ea84728531d36841ca8f98f9e8680bcf4e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:10 -0800
Subject: cgroups: fix CONTENTS in cgroups documentation

Add a forgotten item into CONTENTS.

Signed-off-by: Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Acked-by: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 1 +
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index 764007b63921..c0358c30c64f 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ CONTENTS:
 2. Usage Examples and Syntax
   2.1 Basic Usage
   2.2 Attaching processes
+  2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name
 3. Kernel API
   3.1 Overview
   3.2 Synchronization
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 7dc74be032bfcaa2f9d9e4296ff5bbddfa9e2f19 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:13 -0800
Subject: memcg: add interface to move charge at task migration

In current memcg, charges associated with a task aren't moved to the new
cgroup at task migration.  Some users feel this behavior to be strange.
These patches are for this feature, that is, for charging to the new
cgroup and, of course, uncharging from the old cgroup at task migration.

This patch adds "memory.move_charge_at_immigrate" file, which is a flag
file to determine whether charges should be moved to the new cgroup at
task migration or not and what type of charges should be moved.  This
patch also adds read and write handlers of the file.

This patch also adds no-op handlers for this feature.  These handlers will
be implemented in later patches.  And you cannot write any values other
than 0 to move_charge_at_immigrate yet.

Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 56 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++--
 1 file changed, 54 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index b871f2552b45..e726fb0df719 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -262,10 +262,12 @@ some of the pages cached in the cgroup (page cache pages).
 4.2 Task migration
 
 When a task migrates from one cgroup to another, it's charge is not
-carried forward. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
+carried forward by default. The pages allocated from the original cgroup still
 remain charged to it, the charge is dropped when the page is freed or
 reclaimed.
 
+Note: You can move charges of a task along with task migration. See 8.
+
 4.3 Removing a cgroup
 
 A cgroup can be removed by rmdir, but as discussed in sections 4.1 and 4.2, a
@@ -414,7 +416,57 @@ NOTE1: Soft limits take effect over a long period of time, since they involve
 NOTE2: It is recommended to set the soft limit always below the hard limit,
        otherwise the hard limit will take precedence.
 
-8. TODO
+8. Move charges at task migration
+
+Users can move charges associated with a task along with task migration, that
+is, uncharge task's pages from the old cgroup and charge them to the new cgroup.
+
+8.1 Interface
+
+This feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled(and disabled again) by
+writing to memory.move_charge_at_immigrate of the destination cgroup.
+
+If you want to enable it:
+
+# echo (some positive value) > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+
+Note: Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type
+      of charges should be moved. See 8.2 for details.
+Note: Charges are moved only when you move mm->owner, IOW, a leader of a thread
+      group.
+Note: If we cannot find enough space for the task in the destination cgroup, we
+      try to make space by reclaiming memory. Task migration may fail if we
+      cannot make enough space.
+Note: It can take several seconds if you move charges in giga bytes order.
+
+And if you want disable it again:
+
+# echo 0 > memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+
+8.2 Type of charges which can be move
+
+Each bits of move_charge_at_immigrate has its own meaning about what type of
+charges should be moved.
+
+  bit | what type of charges would be moved ?
+ -----+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+   0  | A charge of an anonymous page(or swap of it) used by the target task.
+      | Those pages and swaps must be used only by the target task. You must
+      | enable Swap Extension(see 2.4) to enable move of swap charges.
+
+Note: Those pages and swaps must be charged to the old cgroup.
+Note: More type of pages(e.g. file cache, shmem,) will be supported by other
+      bits in future.
+
+8.3 TODO
+
+- Add support for other types of pages(e.g. file cache, shmem, etc.).
+- Implement madvise(2) to let users decide the vma to be moved or not to be
+  moved.
+- All of moving charge operations are done under cgroup_mutex. It's not good
+  behavior to hold the mutex too long, so we may need some trick.
+
+9. TODO
 
 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 024914477e15ef8b17f271ec47f1bb8a589f0806 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:17 -0800
Subject: memcg: move charges of anonymous swap

This patch is another core part of this move-charge-at-task-migration
feature.  It enables moving charges of anonymous swaps.

To move the charge of swap, we need to exchange swap_cgroup's record.

In current implementation, swap_cgroup's record is protected by:

  - page lock: if the entry is on swap cache.
  - swap_lock: if the entry is not on swap cache.

This works well in usual swap-in/out activity.

But this behavior make the feature of moving swap charge check many
conditions to exchange swap_cgroup's record safely.

So I changed modification of swap_cgroup's recored(swap_cgroup_record())
to use xchg, and define a new function to cmpxchg swap_cgroup's record.

This patch also enables moving charge of non pte_present but not uncharged
swap caches, which can be exist on swap-out path, by getting the target
pages via find_get_page() as do_mincore() does.

[kosaki.motohiro@jp.fujitsu.com: fix ia64 build]
[akpm@linux-foundation.org: fix typos]
Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: KOSAKI Motohiro <kosaki.motohiro@jp.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 2 ++
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index e726fb0df719..1f59a1a38bd9 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -420,6 +420,8 @@ NOTE2: It is recommended to set the soft limit always below the hard limit,
 
 Users can move charges associated with a task along with task migration, that
 is, uncharge task's pages from the old cgroup and charge them to the new cgroup.
+This feature is not supported in !CONFIG_MMU environments because of lack of
+page tables.
 
 8.1 Interface
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0dea116876eefc9c7ca9c5d74fe665481e499fa3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:20 -0800
Subject: cgroup: implement eventfd-based generic API for notifications

This patchset introduces eventfd-based API for notifications in cgroups
and implements memory notifications on top of it.

It uses statistics in memory controler to track memory usage.

Output of time(1) on building kernel on tmpfs:

Root cgroup before changes:
	make -j2  506.37 user 60.93s system 193% cpu 4:52.77 total
Non-root cgroup before changes:
	make -j2  507.14 user 62.66s system 193% cpu 4:54.74 total
Root cgroup after changes (0 thresholds):
	make -j2  507.13 user 62.20s system 193% cpu 4:53.55 total
Non-root cgroup after changes (0 thresholds):
	make -j2  507.70 user 64.20s system 193% cpu 4:55.70 total
Root cgroup after changes (1 thresholds, never crossed):
	make -j2  506.97 user 62.20s system 193% cpu 4:53.90 total
Non-root cgroup after changes (1 thresholds, never crossed):
	make -j2  507.55 user 64.08s system 193% cpu 4:55.63 total

This patch:

Introduce the write-only file "cgroup.event_control" in every cgroup.

To register new notification handler you need:
- create an eventfd;
- open a control file to be monitored. Callbacks register_event() and
  unregister_event() must be defined for the control file;
- write "<event_fd> <control_fd> <args>" to cgroup.event_control.
  Interpretation of args is defined by control file implementation;

eventfd will be woken up by control file implementation or when the
cgroup is removed.

To unregister notification handler just close eventfd.

If you need notification functionality for a control file you have to
implement callbacks register_event() and unregister_event() in the
struct cftype.

[kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com: Kconfig fix]
Signed-off-by: Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Reviewed-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
Cc: Dan Malek <dan@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Vladislav Buzov <vbuzov@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Cc: Alexander Shishkin <virtuoso@slind.org>
Cc: Davide Libenzi <davidel@xmailserver.org>
Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt | 20 ++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
index c0358c30c64f..fd588ff0e296 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ CONTENTS:
   2.1 Basic Usage
   2.2 Attaching processes
   2.3 Mounting hierarchies by name
+  2.4 Notification API
 3. Kernel API
   3.1 Overview
   3.2 Synchronization
@@ -435,6 +436,25 @@ you give a subsystem a name.
 The name of the subsystem appears as part of the hierarchy description
 in /proc/mounts and /proc/<pid>/cgroups.
 
+2.4 Notification API
+--------------------
+
+There is mechanism which allows to get notifications about changing
+status of a cgroup.
+
+To register new notification handler you need:
+ - create a file descriptor for event notification using eventfd(2);
+ - open a control file to be monitored (e.g. memory.usage_in_bytes);
+ - write "<event_fd> <control_fd> <args>" to cgroup.event_control.
+   Interpretation of args is defined by control file implementation;
+
+eventfd will be woken up by control file implementation or when the
+cgroup is removed.
+
+To unregister notification handler just close eventfd.
+
+NOTE: Support of notifications should be implemented for the control
+file. See documentation for the subsystem.
 
 3. Kernel API
 =============
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 2e72b6347c9459e6cff5634ddc815485bae6985f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:24 -0800
Subject: memcg: implement memory thresholds

It allows to register multiple memory and memsw thresholds and gets
notifications when it crosses.

To register a threshold application need:
- create an eventfd;
- open memory.usage_in_bytes or memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes;
- write string like "<event_fd> <memory.usage_in_bytes> <threshold>" to
  cgroup.event_control.

Application will be notified through eventfd when memory usage crosses
threshold in any direction.

It's applicable for root and non-root cgroup.

It uses stats to track memory usage, simmilar to soft limits. It checks
if we need to send event to userspace on every 100 page in/out. I guess
it's good compromise between performance and accuracy of thresholds.

[akpm@linux-foundation.org: coding-style fixes]
[nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp: fix documentation merge issue]
Signed-off-by: Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
Cc: Dan Malek <dan@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Vladislav Buzov <vbuzov@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Cc: Alexander Shishkin <virtuoso@slind.org>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 19 ++++++++++++++++++-
 1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index 1f59a1a38bd9..268ab08222dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -468,7 +468,24 @@ Note: More type of pages(e.g. file cache, shmem,) will be supported by other
 - All of moving charge operations are done under cgroup_mutex. It's not good
   behavior to hold the mutex too long, so we may need some trick.
 
-9. TODO
+9. Memory thresholds
+
+Memory controler implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification
+API (see cgroups.txt). It allows to register multiple memory and memsw
+thresholds and gets notifications when it crosses.
+
+To register a threshold application need:
+ - create an eventfd using eventfd(2);
+ - open memory.usage_in_bytes or memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes;
+ - write string like "<event_fd> <memory.usage_in_bytes> <threshold>" to
+   cgroup.event_control.
+
+Application will be notified through eventfd when memory usage crosses
+threshold in any direction.
+
+It's applicable for root and non-root cgroup.
+
+10. TODO
 
 1. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
 2. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1080d7a30304d03b1d9fd530aacd8aece2d702a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:31 -0800
Subject: memcg: update memcg_test.txt

Update memcg_test.txt to describe how to test the move-charge feature.

Signed-off-by: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Acked-by: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt | 22 ++++++++++++++++++++--
 1 file changed, 20 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
index 72db89ed0609..e01148886b5b 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 Memory Resource Controller(Memcg)  Implementation Memo.
-Last Updated: 2009/1/20
-Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.29-rc2.
+Last Updated: 2010/2
+Base Kernel Version: based on 2.6.33-rc7-mm(candidate for 34).
 
 Because VM is getting complex (one of reasons is memcg...), memcg's behavior
 is complex. This is a document for memcg's internal behavior.
@@ -378,3 +378,21 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 	#echo 50M > memory.limit_in_bytes
 	#echo 50M > memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes
 	run 51M of malloc
+
+ 9.9 Move charges at task migration
+	Charges associated with a task can be moved along with task migration.
+
+	(Shell-A)
+	#mkdir /cgroup/A
+	#echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
+	run some programs which uses some amount of memory in /cgroup/A.
+
+	(Shell-B)
+	#mkdir /cgroup/B
+	#echo 1 >/cgroup/B/memory.move_charge_at_immigrate
+	#echo "pid of the program running in group A" >/cgroup/B/tasks
+
+	You can see charges have been moved by reading *.usage_in_bytes or
+	memory.stat of both A and B.
+	See 8.2 of Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt to see what value should be
+	written to move_charge_at_immigrate.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From daaf1e68874c078a15ae6ae827751839c4d81739 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:32 -0800
Subject: memcg: handle panic_on_oom=always case

Presently, if panic_on_oom=2, the whole system panics even if the oom
happend in some special situation (as cpuset, mempolicy....).  Then,
panic_on_oom=2 means painc_on_oom_always.

Now, memcg doesn't check panic_on_oom flag. This patch adds a check.

BTW, how it's useful ?

kdump+panic_on_oom=2 is the last tool to investigate what happens in
oom-ed system.  When a task is killed, the sysytem recovers and there will
be few hint to know what happnes.  In mission critical system, oom should
never happen.  Then, panic_on_oom=2+kdump is useful to avoid next OOM by
knowing precise information via snapshot.

TODO:
 - For memcg, it's for isolate system's memory usage, oom-notiifer and
   freeze_at_oom (or rest_at_oom) should be implemented. Then, management
   daemon can do similar jobs (as kdump) or taking snapshot per cgroup.

Signed-off-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: David Rientjes <rientjes@google.com>
Cc: Nick Piggin <npiggin@suse.de>
Reviewed-by: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt | 5 ++++-
 Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt      | 5 ++++-
 2 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
index 268ab08222dd..f8bc802d70b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt
@@ -182,6 +182,8 @@ list.
 NOTE: Reclaim does not work for the root cgroup, since we cannot set any
 limits on the root cgroup.
 
+Note2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic.
+
 2. Locking
 
 The memory controller uses the following hierarchy
@@ -379,7 +381,8 @@ The feature can be disabled by
 NOTE1: Enabling/disabling will fail if the cgroup already has other
 cgroups created below it.
 
-NOTE2: This feature can be enabled/disabled per subtree.
+NOTE2: When panic_on_oom is set to "2", the whole system will panic in
+case of an oom event in any cgroup.
 
 7. Soft limits
 
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index fc5790d36cd9..6c7d18c53f84 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -573,11 +573,14 @@ Because other nodes' memory may be free. This means system total status
 may be not fatal yet.
 
 If this is set to 2, the kernel panics compulsorily even on the
-above-mentioned.
+above-mentioned. Even oom happens under memory cgroup, the whole
+system panics.
 
 The default value is 0.
 1 and 2 are for failover of clustering. Please select either
 according to your policy of failover.
+panic_on_oom=2+kdump gives you very strong tool to investigate
+why oom happens. You can get snapshot.
 
 =============================================================
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1d8fd973a41942bc760dd21581e24117bc1dd063 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:35 -0800
Subject: cgroups: add simple listener of cgroup events to documentation

An example of cgroup notification API usage.

Signed-off-by: Kirill A.  Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Reviewed-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
Cc: Dan Malek <dan@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c | 110 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 110 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8c2bfc4a6358
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+ * cgroup_event_listener.c - Simple listener of cgroup events
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
+ */
+
+#include <assert.h>
+#include <errno.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#include <libgen.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+#include <sys/eventfd.h>
+
+#define USAGE_STR "Usage: cgroup_event_listener <path-to-control-file> <args>\n"
+
+int main(int argc, char **argv)
+{
+	int efd = -1;
+	int cfd = -1;
+	int event_control = -1;
+	char event_control_path[PATH_MAX];
+	char line[LINE_MAX];
+	int ret;
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+		fputs(USAGE_STR, stderr);
+		return 1;
+	}
+
+	cfd = open(argv[1], O_RDONLY);
+	if (cfd == -1) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open %s: %s\n", argv[1],
+				strerror(errno));
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	ret = snprintf(event_control_path, PATH_MAX, "%s/cgroup.event_control",
+			dirname(argv[1]));
+	if (ret >= PATH_MAX) {
+		fputs("Path to cgroup.event_control is too long\n", stderr);
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	event_control = open(event_control_path, O_WRONLY);
+	if (event_control == -1) {
+		fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open %s: %s\n", event_control_path,
+				strerror(errno));
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	efd = eventfd(0, 0);
+	if (efd == -1) {
+		perror("eventfd() failed");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	ret = snprintf(line, LINE_MAX, "%d %d %s", efd, cfd, argv[2]);
+	if (ret >= LINE_MAX) {
+		fputs("Arguments string is too long\n", stderr);
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	ret = write(event_control, line, strlen(line) + 1);
+	if (ret == -1) {
+		perror("Cannot write to cgroup.event_control");
+		goto out;
+	}
+
+	while (1) {
+		uint64_t result;
+
+		ret = read(efd, &result, sizeof(result));
+		if (ret == -1) {
+			if (errno == EINTR)
+				continue;
+			perror("Cannot read from eventfd");
+			break;
+		}
+		assert(ret == sizeof(result));
+
+		ret = access(event_control_path, W_OK);
+		if ((ret == -1) && (errno == ENOENT)) {
+				puts("The cgroup seems to have removed.");
+				ret = 0;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		if (ret == -1) {
+			perror("cgroup.event_control "
+					"is not accessable any more");
+			break;
+		}
+
+		printf("%s %s: crossed\n", argv[1], argv[2]);
+	}
+
+out:
+	if (efd >= 0)
+		close(efd);
+	if (event_control >= 0)
+		close(event_control);
+	if (cfd >= 0)
+		close(cfd);
+
+	return (ret != 0);
+}
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 1e111452d457ceedec8a57fc3d45b1312e736fba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:36 -0800
Subject: memcg: update memcg_test.txt to describe memory thresholds

Decription of sanity check for memory thresholds.

Signed-off-by: Kirill A.  Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Acked-by: KAMEZAWA Hiroyuki <kamezawa.hiroyu@jp.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Paul Menage <menage@google.com>
Cc: Li Zefan <lizf@cn.fujitsu.com>
Cc: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Cc: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
Cc: Dan Malek <dan@embeddedalley.com>
Cc: Daisuke Nishimura <nishimura@mxp.nes.nec.co.jp>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt | 21 +++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 21 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
index e01148886b5b..4d32e0ed1917 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
@@ -396,3 +396,24 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 	memory.stat of both A and B.
 	See 8.2 of Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt to see what value should be
 	written to move_charge_at_immigrate.
+
+ 9.10 Memory thresholds
+	Memory controler implements memory thresholds using cgroups notification
+	API. You can use Documentation/cgroups/cgroup_event_listener.c to test
+	it.
+
+	(Shell-A) Create cgroup and run event listener
+	# mkdir /cgroup/A
+	# ./cgroup_event_listener /cgroup/A/memory.usage_in_bytes 5M
+
+	(Shell-B) Add task to cgroup and try to allocate and free memory
+	# echo $$ >/cgroup/A/tasks
+	# a="$(dd if=/dev/zero bs=1M count=10)"
+	# a=
+
+	You will see message from cgroup_event_listener every time you cross
+	the thresholds.
+
+	Use /cgroup/A/memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes to test memsw thresholds.
+
+	It's good idea to test root cgroup as well.
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0263c12c12ccc90edc9d856fa839f8936183e6d1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: "Kirill A. Shutemov" <kirill@shutemov.name>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:22:37 -0800
Subject: memcg: fix typos in memcg_test.txt

Signed-off-by: Kirill A. Shutemov <kirill@shutemov.name>
Reviewed-by: Balbir Singh <balbir@linux.vnet.ibm.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt | 4 ++--
 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
index 4d32e0ed1917..f7f68b2ac199 100644
--- a/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memcg_test.txt
@@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 	race and lock dependency with other cgroup subsystems.
 
 	example)
-	# mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
+	# mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o cpuset,memory,cpu,devices
 
 	and do task move, mkdir, rmdir etc...under this.
 
@@ -348,7 +348,7 @@ Under below explanation, we assume CONFIG_MEM_RES_CTRL_SWAP=y.
 
 	For example, test like following is good.
 	(Shell-A)
-	# mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -t memory
+	# mount -t cgroup none /cgroup -o memory
 	# mkdir /cgroup/test
 	# echo 40M > /cgroup/test/memory.limit_in_bytes
 	# echo 0 > /cgroup/test/tasks
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From ae74e823cb7d4cd476f623fce9a38f625f6c09a8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Martin Wilck <martin.wilck@ts.fujitsu.com>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:06 -0800
Subject: ipmi: add parameter to limit CPU usage in kipmid

In some cases kipmid can use a lot of CPU.  This adds a way to tune the
CPU used by kipmid to help in those cases.  By setting kipmid_max_busy_us
to a value between 100 and 500, it is possible to bring down kipmid CPU
load to practically 0 without loosing too much ipmi throughput
performance.  Not setting the value, or setting the value to zero,
operation is unaffected.

Signed-off-by: Martin Wilck <martin.wilck@ts.fujitsu.com>
Signed-off-by: Corey Minyard <cminyard@mvista.com>
Cc: Jean Delvare <jdelvare@suse.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/IPMI.txt | 12 ++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 12 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/IPMI.txt b/Documentation/IPMI.txt
index bc38283379f0..69dd29ed824e 100644
--- a/Documentation/IPMI.txt
+++ b/Documentation/IPMI.txt
@@ -365,6 +365,7 @@ You can change this at module load time (for a module) with:
        regshifts=<shift1>,<shift2>,...
        slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,...
        force_kipmid=<enable1>,<enable2>,...
+       kipmid_max_busy_us=<ustime1>,<ustime2>,...
        unload_when_empty=[0|1]
 
 Each of these except si_trydefaults is a list, the first item for the
@@ -433,6 +434,7 @@ kernel command line as:
        ipmi_si.regshifts=<shift1>,<shift2>,...
        ipmi_si.slave_addrs=<addr1>,<addr2>,...
        ipmi_si.force_kipmid=<enable1>,<enable2>,...
+       ipmi_si.kipmid_max_busy_us=<ustime1>,<ustime2>,...
 
 It works the same as the module parameters of the same names.
 
@@ -450,6 +452,16 @@ force this thread on or off.  If you force it off and don't have
 interrupts, the driver will run VERY slowly.  Don't blame me,
 these interfaces suck.
 
+Unfortunately, this thread can use a lot of CPU depending on the
+interface's performance.  This can waste a lot of CPU and cause
+various issues with detecting idle CPU and using extra power.  To
+avoid this, the kipmid_max_busy_us sets the maximum amount of time, in
+microseconds, that kipmid will spin before sleeping for a tick.  This
+value sets a balance between performance and CPU waste and needs to be
+tuned to your needs.  Maybe, someday, auto-tuning will be added, but
+that's not a simple thing and even the auto-tuning would need to be
+tuned to the user's desired performance.
+
 The driver supports a hot add and remove of interfaces.  This way,
 interfaces can be added or removed after the kernel is up and running.
 This is done using /sys/modules/ipmi_si/parameters/hotmod, which is a
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 039956e9199b71ea673954e025f52f319110ca58 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:15 -0800
Subject: Documentation/DMA-API.txt: remove deprecated function descriptions

dma_sync_single(), pci_dma_sync_single(), dma_sync_sg(), and
pci_dma_sync_sg() are deprecated.  We should not advertise them.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Acked-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Acked-by: Joerg Roedel <joro@8bytes.org>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 28 ----------------------------
 1 file changed, 28 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 5aceb88b3f8b..bb0e75e368b2 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -364,34 +364,6 @@ API.
 Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
 physical entries returned.
 
-void
-dma_sync_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
-		enum dma_data_direction direction)
-void
-pci_dma_sync_single(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
-			   size_t size, int direction)
-void
-dma_sync_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
-			  enum dma_data_direction direction)
-void
-pci_dma_sync_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
-		       int nelems, int direction)
-
-Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping.  All the
-parameters must be the same as those passed into the single mapping
-API.
-
-Notes:  You must do this:
-
-- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
-  (use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
-- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
-  (use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
-- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
-  DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
-
-See also dma_map_single().
-
 dma_addr_t
 dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
 		     enum dma_data_direction dir,
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 9705ef7ec8c67a62474291bb4b235927bdf702db Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:17 -0800
Subject: DMA-API.txt: add dma_sync_single/sg API description

This adds the description of the following eight function:

dma_sync_single_for_cpu
pci_dma_sync_single_for_cpu
dma_sync_single_for_device
pci_dma_sync_single_for_device
dma_sync_sg_for_cpu
pci_dma_sync_sg_for_cpu
dma_sync_sg_for_device
pci_dma_sync_sg_for_device

It was unclear that the API permits a partial sync (some network drivers
already do though).  I made it clear that the sync_single API can do a
partial sync but the sync_sg API can't.

We could do a partial sync with the sync_sg API too, however, it's
difficult for driver writers to correctly use the sync_sg API for a
partial sync since the scatterlists passed in to the mapping API can't be
modified.  It's unlikely that driver writers want to do a partial sync
with the sync_sg API (because the sync_sg API are usually used for block
drivers).  So I think that it's better to forbid a partial sync with the
sync_sg API.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Acked-by: David Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Acked-by: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@suse.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 42 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 42 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index bb0e75e368b2..c8db3d0dba50 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -364,6 +364,48 @@ API.
 Note: <nents> must be the number you passed in, *not* the number of
 physical entries returned.
 
+void
+dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
+			enum dma_data_direction direction)
+void
+pci_dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
+			    size_t size, int direction)
+void
+dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
+			   enum dma_data_direction direction)
+void
+pci_dma_sync_single_for_device(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
+			       size_t size, int direction)
+void
+dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
+		    enum dma_data_direction direction)
+void
+pci_dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
+		        int nelems, int direction)
+void
+dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
+		       enum dma_data_direction direction)
+void
+pci_dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
+		           int nelems, int direction)
+
+Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the cpu
+and device. With the sync_sg API, all the parameters must be the same
+as those passed into the single mapping API. With the sync_single API,
+you can use dma_handle and size parameters that aren't identical to
+those passed into the single mapping API to do a partial sync.
+
+Notes:  You must do this:
+
+- Before reading values that have been written by DMA from the device
+  (use the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction)
+- After writing values that will be written to the device using DMA
+  (use the DMA_TO_DEVICE) direction
+- before *and* after handing memory to the device if the memory is
+  DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
+
+See also dma_map_single().
+
 dma_addr_t
 dma_map_single_attrs(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
 		     enum dma_data_direction dir,
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 8127bfc5645db0e050468e0ff971b4081f73ddcf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:18 -0800
Subject: DMA-API.txt: remove dma_sync_single_range description

dma_sync_single_for_cpu/for_device supports a partial sync so there is no
point to have dma_sync_single_range (also dma_sync_single was obsoleted
long ago, replaced with dma_sync_single_for_cpu/for_device).

There is no user of dma_sync_single_range() in mainline and only Alpha
architecture supports dma_sync_single_range().  So it's unlikely that
someone out of the tree uses it.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Acked-by: David Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Acked-by: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@suse.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 10 ----------
 1 file changed, 10 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index c8db3d0dba50..364a6cb444a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -527,16 +527,6 @@ line, but it will guarantee that one or more cache lines fit exactly
 into the width returned by this call.  It will also always be a power
 of two for easy alignment.
 
-void
-dma_sync_single_range(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
-		      unsigned long offset, size_t size,
-		      enum dma_data_direction direction)
-
-Does a partial sync, starting at offset and continuing for size.  You
-must be careful to observe the cache alignment and width when doing
-anything like this.  You must also be extra careful about accessing
-memory you intend to sync partially.
-
 void
 dma_cache_sync(struct device *dev, void *vaddr, size_t size,
 	       enum dma_data_direction direction)
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 0acedc124aca35f5cce9d4ee288dc372bf517e09 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:31 -0800
Subject: dma-mapping.h: add the dma_unmap state API

Adds the following macros:

DECLARE_DMA_UNMAP_ADDR(ADDR_NAME)
DECLARE_DMA_UNMAP_LEN(LEN_NAME)
dma_unmap_addr(PTR, ADDR_NAME)
dma_unmap_addr_set(PTR, ADDR_NAME, VAL)
dma_unmap_len(PTR, LEN_NAME)
dma_unmap_len_set(PTR, LEN_NAME, VAL)

The API corresponds to the pci_unmap state API.  We'll move to this new
generic API from the PCI specific API in the long term.  As
include/asm-generic/pci-dma-compat.h does, the pci_unmap API simply calls
the new generic API for some time.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@suse.de>
Cc: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Cc: Jesse Barnes <jbarnes@virtuousgeek.org>
Cc: Arnd Bergmann <arnd@arndb.de>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 58 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 58 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 364a6cb444a5..29a48fbae779 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -472,6 +472,64 @@ void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
 	....
 
 
+Part Ie - Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
+--------------------------------
+
+On some platforms, dma_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
+Therefore, keeping track of the mapping address and length is a waste
+of space. Instead of filling your drivers up with ifdefs and the like
+to "work around" this (which would defeat the whole purpose of a
+portable API) the following facilities are provided.
+
+Actually, instead of describing the macros one by one, we'll
+transform some example code.
+
+1) Use DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
+   Example, before:
+
+	struct ring_state {
+		struct sk_buff *skb;
+		dma_addr_t mapping;
+		__u32 len;
+	};
+
+   after:
+
+	struct ring_state {
+		struct sk_buff *skb;
+		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_ADDR(mapping);
+		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_LEN(len);
+	};
+
+2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set to set these values.
+   Example, before:
+
+	ringp->mapping = FOO;
+	ringp->len = BAR;
+
+   after:
+
+	dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
+	dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
+
+3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len} to access these values.
+   Example, before:
+
+	dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
+			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
+
+   after:
+
+	dma_unmap_single(dev,
+			 dma_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
+			 dma_unmap_len(ringp, len),
+			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
+
+It really should be self-explanatory.  We treat the ADDR and LEN
+separately, because it is possible for an implementation to only
+need the address in order to perform the unmap operation.
+
+
 Part II - Advanced dma_ usage
 -----------------------------
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 6a1961f49ee8d7339ea2454443dfc0460e0b2748 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:39 -0800
Subject: dma-mapping: dma-mapping.h: add dma_set_coherent_mask

dma_set_coherent_mask corresponds to pci_set_consistent_dma_mask.  This is
necessary to move to the generic device model DMA API from the PCI bus
specific API in the long term.

dma_set_coherent_mask works in the exact same way that
pci_set_consistent_dma_mask does.  So this patch also changes
pci_set_consistent_dma_mask to call dma_set_coherent_mask.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@suse.de>
Cc: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
Cc: Jesse Barnes <jbarnes@virtuousgeek.org>
Cc: Benjamin Herrenschmidt <benh@kernel.crashing.org>
Cc: Russell King <linux@arm.linux.org.uk>
Cc: Greg KH <greg@kroah.com>
Cc: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 10 ++++++++++
 1 file changed, 10 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 29a48fbae779..0fc5728ed487 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -167,6 +167,16 @@ parameters if it is.
 
 Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
 
+int
+dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
+int
+pci_set_consistent_dma_mask(struct pci_device *dev, u64 mask)
+
+Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
+parameters if it is.
+
+Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
+
 u64
 dma_get_required_mask(struct device *dev)
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 216bf58f4092df33262bea498f0460657f4842a4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:42 -0800
Subject: Documentation: convert PCI-DMA-mapping.txt to use the generic DMA API

- replace the PCI DMA API (i.e. pci_dma_*) with the generic DMA API.

- make the document more generic (use the PCI specific explanation as
  an example).

[akpm@linux-foundation.org: fix things Randy noticed]
Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net>
Reviewed-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt | 352 +++++++++++++++++-----------------
 1 file changed, 172 insertions(+), 180 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt b/Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
index ecad88d9fe59..52618ab069ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
+++ b/Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
-			Dynamic DMA mapping
-			===================
+		     Dynamic DMA mapping Guide
+		     =========================
 
 		 David S. Miller <davem@redhat.com>
 		 Richard Henderson <rth@cygnus.com>
 		  Jakub Jelinek <jakub@redhat.com>
 
-This document describes the DMA mapping system in terms of the pci_
-API.  For a similar API that works for generic devices, see
+This is a guide to device driver writers on how to use the DMA API
+with example pseudo-code.  For a concise description of the API, see
 DMA-API.txt.
 
 Most of the 64bit platforms have special hardware that translates bus
@@ -26,12 +26,15 @@ mapped only for the time they are actually used and unmapped after the DMA
 transfer.
 
 The following API will work of course even on platforms where no such
-hardware exists, see e.g. arch/x86/include/asm/pci.h for how it is implemented on
-top of the virt_to_bus interface.
+hardware exists.
+
+Note that the DMA API works with any bus independent of the underlying
+microprocessor architecture. You should use the DMA API rather than
+the bus specific DMA API (e.g. pci_dma_*).
 
 First of all, you should make sure
 
-#include <linux/pci.h>
+#include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
 
 is in your driver. This file will obtain for you the definition of the
 dma_addr_t (which can hold any valid DMA address for the platform)
@@ -78,44 +81,43 @@ for you to DMA from/to.
 			DMA addressing limitations
 
 Does your device have any DMA addressing limitations?  For example, is
-your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address
-on the PCI bus for SAC DMA transfers?  If so, you need to inform the
-PCI layer of this fact.
+your device only capable of driving the low order 24-bits of address?
+If so, you need to inform the kernel of this fact.
 
 By default, the kernel assumes that your device can address the full
-32-bits in a SAC cycle.  For a 64-bit DAC capable device, this needs
-to be increased.  And for a device with limitations, as discussed in
-the previous paragraph, it needs to be decreased.
-
-pci_alloc_consistent() by default will return 32-bit DMA addresses.
-PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to support 64-bit
-addressing (DAC) for all transactions. And at least one platform (SGI
-SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to operate correctly when
-the IO bus is in PCI-X mode. Therefore, like with pci_set_dma_mask(),
-it's good practice to call pci_set_consistent_dma_mask() to set the
-appropriate mask even if your device only supports 32-bit DMA
-(default) and especially if it's a PCI-X device.
-
-For correct operation, you must interrogate the PCI layer in your
-device probe routine to see if the PCI controller on the machine can
-properly support the DMA addressing limitation your device has.  It is
-good style to do this even if your device holds the default setting,
+32-bits.  For a 64-bit capable device, this needs to be increased.
+And for a device with limitations, as discussed in the previous
+paragraph, it needs to be decreased.
+
+Special note about PCI: PCI-X specification requires PCI-X devices to
+support 64-bit addressing (DAC) for all transactions.  And at least
+one platform (SGI SN2) requires 64-bit consistent allocations to
+operate correctly when the IO bus is in PCI-X mode.
+
+For correct operation, you must interrogate the kernel in your device
+probe routine to see if the DMA controller on the machine can properly
+support the DMA addressing limitation your device has.  It is good
+style to do this even if your device holds the default setting,
 because this shows that you did think about these issues wrt. your
 device.
 
-The query is performed via a call to pci_set_dma_mask():
+The query is performed via a call to dma_set_mask():
 
-	int pci_set_dma_mask(struct pci_dev *pdev, u64 device_mask);
+	int dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
 
 The query for consistent allocations is performed via a call to
-pci_set_consistent_dma_mask():
+dma_set_coherent_mask():
 
-	int pci_set_consistent_dma_mask(struct pci_dev *pdev, u64 device_mask);
+	int dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask);
 
-Here, pdev is a pointer to the PCI device struct of your device, and
-device_mask is a bit mask describing which bits of a PCI address your
-device supports.  It returns zero if your card can perform DMA
-properly on the machine given the address mask you provided.
+Here, dev is a pointer to the device struct of your device, and mask
+is a bit mask describing which bits of an address your device
+supports.  It returns zero if your card can perform DMA properly on
+the machine given the address mask you provided.  In general, the
+device struct of your device is embedded in the bus specific device
+struct of your device.  For example, a pointer to the device struct of
+your PCI device is pdev->dev (pdev is a pointer to the PCI device
+struct of your device).
 
 If it returns non-zero, your device cannot perform DMA properly on
 this platform, and attempting to do so will result in undefined
@@ -133,31 +135,30 @@ of your driver reports that performance is bad or that the device is not
 even detected, you can ask them for the kernel messages to find out
 exactly why.
 
-The standard 32-bit addressing PCI device would do something like
-this:
+The standard 32-bit addressing device would do something like this:
 
-	if (pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
+	if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
 		printk(KERN_WARNING
 		       "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n");
 		goto ignore_this_device;
 	}
 
-Another common scenario is a 64-bit capable device.  The approach
-here is to try for 64-bit DAC addressing, but back down to a
-32-bit mask should that fail.  The PCI platform code may fail the
-64-bit mask not because the platform is not capable of 64-bit
-addressing.  Rather, it may fail in this case simply because
-32-bit SAC addressing is done more efficiently than DAC addressing.
-Sparc64 is one platform which behaves in this way.
+Another common scenario is a 64-bit capable device.  The approach here
+is to try for 64-bit addressing, but back down to a 32-bit mask that
+should not fail.  The kernel may fail the 64-bit mask not because the
+platform is not capable of 64-bit addressing.  Rather, it may fail in
+this case simply because 32-bit addressing is done more efficiently
+than 64-bit addressing.  For example, Sparc64 PCI SAC addressing is
+more efficient than DAC addressing.
 
 Here is how you would handle a 64-bit capable device which can drive
 all 64-bits when accessing streaming DMA:
 
 	int using_dac;
 
-	if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
+	if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
 		using_dac = 1;
-	} else if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
+	} else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
 		using_dac = 0;
 	} else {
 		printk(KERN_WARNING
@@ -170,36 +171,36 @@ the case would look like this:
 
 	int using_dac, consistent_using_dac;
 
-	if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
+	if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
 		using_dac = 1;
 	   	consistent_using_dac = 1;
-		pci_set_consistent_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64));
-	} else if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
+		dma_set_coherent_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64));
+	} else if (!dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32))) {
 		using_dac = 0;
 		consistent_using_dac = 0;
-		pci_set_consistent_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32));
+		dma_set_coherent_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(32));
 	} else {
 		printk(KERN_WARNING
 		       "mydev: No suitable DMA available.\n");
 		goto ignore_this_device;
 	}
 
-pci_set_consistent_dma_mask() will always be able to set the same or a
-smaller mask as pci_set_dma_mask(). However for the rare case that a
+dma_set_coherent_mask() will always be able to set the same or a
+smaller mask as dma_set_mask(). However for the rare case that a
 device driver only uses consistent allocations, one would have to
-check the return value from pci_set_consistent_dma_mask().
+check the return value from dma_set_coherent_mask().
 
 Finally, if your device can only drive the low 24-bits of
-address during PCI bus mastering you might do something like:
+address you might do something like:
 
-	if (pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, DMA_BIT_MASK(24))) {
+	if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(24))) {
 		printk(KERN_WARNING
 		       "mydev: 24-bit DMA addressing not available.\n");
 		goto ignore_this_device;
 	}
 
-When pci_set_dma_mask() is successful, and returns zero, the PCI layer
-saves away this mask you have provided.  The PCI layer will use this
+When dma_set_mask() is successful, and returns zero, the kernel saves
+away this mask you have provided.  The kernel will use this
 information later when you make DMA mappings.
 
 There is a case which we are aware of at this time, which is worth
@@ -208,7 +209,7 @@ functions (for example a sound card provides playback and record
 functions) and the various different functions have _different_
 DMA addressing limitations, you may wish to probe each mask and
 only provide the functionality which the machine can handle.  It
-is important that the last call to pci_set_dma_mask() be for the
+is important that the last call to dma_set_mask() be for the
 most specific mask.
 
 Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done:
@@ -217,17 +218,17 @@ Here is pseudo-code showing how this might be done:
 	#define RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS	DMA_BIT_MASK(24)
 
 	struct my_sound_card *card;
-	struct pci_dev *pdev;
+	struct device *dev;
 
 	...
-	if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, PLAYBACK_ADDRESS_BITS)) {
+	if (!dma_set_mask(dev, PLAYBACK_ADDRESS_BITS)) {
 		card->playback_enabled = 1;
 	} else {
 		card->playback_enabled = 0;
 		printk(KERN_WARNING "%s: Playback disabled due to DMA limitations.\n",
 		       card->name);
 	}
-	if (!pci_set_dma_mask(pdev, RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS)) {
+	if (!dma_set_mask(dev, RECORD_ADDRESS_BITS)) {
 		card->record_enabled = 1;
 	} else {
 		card->record_enabled = 0;
@@ -252,8 +253,8 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
   Think of "consistent" as "synchronous" or "coherent".
 
   The current default is to return consistent memory in the low 32
-  bits of the PCI bus space.  However, for future compatibility you
-  should set the consistent mask even if this default is fine for your
+  bits of the bus space.  However, for future compatibility you should
+  set the consistent mask even if this default is fine for your
   driver.
 
   Good examples of what to use consistent mappings for are:
@@ -285,9 +286,9 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
 	     found in PCI bridges (such as by reading a register's value
 	     after writing it).
 
-- Streaming DMA mappings which are usually mapped for one DMA transfer,
-  unmapped right after it (unless you use pci_dma_sync_* below) and for which
-  hardware can optimize for sequential accesses.
+- Streaming DMA mappings which are usually mapped for one DMA
+  transfer, unmapped right after it (unless you use dma_sync_* below)
+  and for which hardware can optimize for sequential accesses.
 
   This of "streaming" as "asynchronous" or "outside the coherency
   domain".
@@ -302,8 +303,8 @@ There are two types of DMA mappings:
   optimizations the hardware allows.  To this end, when using
   such mappings you must be explicit about what you want to happen.
 
-Neither type of DMA mapping has alignment restrictions that come
-from PCI, although some devices may have such restrictions.
+Neither type of DMA mapping has alignment restrictions that come from
+the underlying bus, although some devices may have such restrictions.
 Also, systems with caches that aren't DMA-coherent will work better
 when the underlying buffers don't share cache lines with other data.
 
@@ -315,33 +316,27 @@ you should do:
 
 	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
 
-	cpu_addr = pci_alloc_consistent(pdev, size, &dma_handle);
-
-where pdev is a struct pci_dev *. This may be called in interrupt context.
-You should use dma_alloc_coherent (see DMA-API.txt) for buses
-where devices don't have struct pci_dev (like ISA, EISA).
+	cpu_addr = dma_alloc_coherent(dev, size, &dma_handle, gfp);
 
-This argument is needed because the DMA translations may be bus
-specific (and often is private to the bus which the device is attached
-to).
+where device is a struct device *. This may be called in interrupt
+context with the GFP_ATOMIC flag.
 
 Size is the length of the region you want to allocate, in bytes.
 
 This routine will allocate RAM for that region, so it acts similarly to
 __get_free_pages (but takes size instead of a page order).  If your
 driver needs regions sized smaller than a page, you may prefer using
-the pci_pool interface, described below.
-
-The consistent DMA mapping interfaces, for non-NULL pdev, will by
-default return a DMA address which is SAC (Single Address Cycle)
-addressable.  Even if the device indicates (via PCI dma mask) that it
-may address the upper 32-bits and thus perform DAC cycles, consistent
-allocation will only return > 32-bit PCI addresses for DMA if the
-consistent dma mask has been explicitly changed via
-pci_set_consistent_dma_mask().  This is true of the pci_pool interface
-as well.
-
-pci_alloc_consistent returns two values: the virtual address which you
+the dma_pool interface, described below.
+
+The consistent DMA mapping interfaces, for non-NULL dev, will by
+default return a DMA address which is 32-bit addressable.  Even if the
+device indicates (via DMA mask) that it may address the upper 32-bits,
+consistent allocation will only return > 32-bit addresses for DMA if
+the consistent DMA mask has been explicitly changed via
+dma_set_coherent_mask().  This is true of the dma_pool interface as
+well.
+
+dma_alloc_coherent returns two values: the virtual address which you
 can use to access it from the CPU and dma_handle which you pass to the
 card.
 
@@ -354,54 +349,54 @@ buffer you receive will not cross a 64K boundary.
 
 To unmap and free such a DMA region, you call:
 
-	pci_free_consistent(pdev, size, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
+	dma_free_coherent(dev, size, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
 
-where pdev, size are the same as in the above call and cpu_addr and
-dma_handle are the values pci_alloc_consistent returned to you.
+where dev, size are the same as in the above call and cpu_addr and
+dma_handle are the values dma_alloc_coherent returned to you.
 This function may not be called in interrupt context.
 
 If your driver needs lots of smaller memory regions, you can write
-custom code to subdivide pages returned by pci_alloc_consistent,
-or you can use the pci_pool API to do that.  A pci_pool is like
-a kmem_cache, but it uses pci_alloc_consistent not __get_free_pages.
+custom code to subdivide pages returned by dma_alloc_coherent,
+or you can use the dma_pool API to do that.  A dma_pool is like
+a kmem_cache, but it uses dma_alloc_coherent not __get_free_pages.
 Also, it understands common hardware constraints for alignment,
 like queue heads needing to be aligned on N byte boundaries.
 
-Create a pci_pool like this:
+Create a dma_pool like this:
 
-	struct pci_pool *pool;
+	struct dma_pool *pool;
 
-	pool = pci_pool_create(name, pdev, size, align, alloc);
+	pool = dma_pool_create(name, dev, size, align, alloc);
 
-The "name" is for diagnostics (like a kmem_cache name); pdev and size
+The "name" is for diagnostics (like a kmem_cache name); dev and size
 are as above.  The device's hardware alignment requirement for this
 type of data is "align" (which is expressed in bytes, and must be a
 power of two).  If your device has no boundary crossing restrictions,
 pass 0 for alloc; passing 4096 says memory allocated from this pool
 must not cross 4KByte boundaries (but at that time it may be better to
-go for pci_alloc_consistent directly instead).
+go for dma_alloc_coherent directly instead).
 
-Allocate memory from a pci pool like this:
+Allocate memory from a dma pool like this:
 
-	cpu_addr = pci_pool_alloc(pool, flags, &dma_handle);
+	cpu_addr = dma_pool_alloc(pool, flags, &dma_handle);
 
 flags are SLAB_KERNEL if blocking is permitted (not in_interrupt nor
-holding SMP locks), SLAB_ATOMIC otherwise.  Like pci_alloc_consistent,
+holding SMP locks), SLAB_ATOMIC otherwise.  Like dma_alloc_coherent,
 this returns two values, cpu_addr and dma_handle.
 
-Free memory that was allocated from a pci_pool like this:
+Free memory that was allocated from a dma_pool like this:
 
-	pci_pool_free(pool, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
+	dma_pool_free(pool, cpu_addr, dma_handle);
 
-where pool is what you passed to pci_pool_alloc, and cpu_addr and
-dma_handle are the values pci_pool_alloc returned. This function
+where pool is what you passed to dma_pool_alloc, and cpu_addr and
+dma_handle are the values dma_pool_alloc returned. This function
 may be called in interrupt context.
 
-Destroy a pci_pool by calling:
+Destroy a dma_pool by calling:
 
-	pci_pool_destroy(pool);
+	dma_pool_destroy(pool);
 
-Make sure you've called pci_pool_free for all memory allocated
+Make sure you've called dma_pool_free for all memory allocated
 from a pool before you destroy the pool. This function may not
 be called in interrupt context.
 
@@ -411,15 +406,15 @@ The interfaces described in subsequent portions of this document
 take a DMA direction argument, which is an integer and takes on
 one of the following values:
 
- PCI_DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
- PCI_DMA_TODEVICE
- PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE
- PCI_DMA_NONE
+ DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL
+ DMA_TO_DEVICE
+ DMA_FROM_DEVICE
+ DMA_NONE
 
 One should provide the exact DMA direction if you know it.
 
-PCI_DMA_TODEVICE means "from main memory to the PCI device"
-PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE means "from the PCI device to main memory"
+DMA_TO_DEVICE means "from main memory to the device"
+DMA_FROM_DEVICE means "from the device to main memory"
 It is the direction in which the data moves during the DMA
 transfer.
 
@@ -427,12 +422,12 @@ You are _strongly_ encouraged to specify this as precisely
 as you possibly can.
 
 If you absolutely cannot know the direction of the DMA transfer,
-specify PCI_DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL.  It means that the DMA can go in
+specify DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL.  It means that the DMA can go in
 either direction.  The platform guarantees that you may legally
 specify this, and that it will work, but this may be at the
 cost of performance for example.
 
-The value PCI_DMA_NONE is to be used for debugging.  One can
+The value DMA_NONE is to be used for debugging.  One can
 hold this in a data structure before you come to know the
 precise direction, and this will help catch cases where your
 direction tracking logic has failed to set things up properly.
@@ -442,21 +437,21 @@ potential platform-specific optimizations of such) is for debugging.
 Some platforms actually have a write permission boolean which DMA
 mappings can be marked with, much like page protections in the user
 program address space.  Such platforms can and do report errors in the
-kernel logs when the PCI controller hardware detects violation of the
+kernel logs when the DMA controller hardware detects violation of the
 permission setting.
 
 Only streaming mappings specify a direction, consistent mappings
 implicitly have a direction attribute setting of
-PCI_DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL.
+DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL.
 
 The SCSI subsystem tells you the direction to use in the
 'sc_data_direction' member of the SCSI command your driver is
 working on.
 
 For Networking drivers, it's a rather simple affair.  For transmit
-packets, map/unmap them with the PCI_DMA_TODEVICE direction
+packets, map/unmap them with the DMA_TO_DEVICE direction
 specifier.  For receive packets, just the opposite, map/unmap them
-with the PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE direction specifier.
+with the DMA_FROM_DEVICE direction specifier.
 
 		  Using Streaming DMA mappings
 
@@ -467,43 +462,43 @@ scatterlist.
 
 To map a single region, you do:
 
-	struct pci_dev *pdev = mydev->pdev;
+	struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
 	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
 	void *addr = buffer->ptr;
 	size_t size = buffer->len;
 
-	dma_handle = pci_map_single(pdev, addr, size, direction);
+	dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
 
 and to unmap it:
 
-	pci_unmap_single(pdev, dma_handle, size, direction);
+	dma_unmap_single(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
 
-You should call pci_unmap_single when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.
+You should call dma_unmap_single when the DMA activity is finished, e.g.
 from the interrupt which told you that the DMA transfer is done.
 
 Using cpu pointers like this for single mappings has a disadvantage,
 you cannot reference HIGHMEM memory in this way.  Thus, there is a
-map/unmap interface pair akin to pci_{map,unmap}_single.  These
+map/unmap interface pair akin to dma_{map,unmap}_single.  These
 interfaces deal with page/offset pairs instead of cpu pointers.
 Specifically:
 
-	struct pci_dev *pdev = mydev->pdev;
+	struct device *dev = &my_dev->dev;
 	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
 	struct page *page = buffer->page;
 	unsigned long offset = buffer->offset;
 	size_t size = buffer->len;
 
-	dma_handle = pci_map_page(pdev, page, offset, size, direction);
+	dma_handle = dma_map_page(dev, page, offset, size, direction);
 
 	...
 
-	pci_unmap_page(pdev, dma_handle, size, direction);
+	dma_unmap_page(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
 
 Here, "offset" means byte offset within the given page.
 
 With scatterlists, you map a region gathered from several regions by:
 
-	int i, count = pci_map_sg(pdev, sglist, nents, direction);
+	int i, count = dma_map_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
 	struct scatterlist *sg;
 
 	for_each_sg(sglist, sg, count, i) {
@@ -527,16 +522,16 @@ accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
 
 To unmap a scatterlist, just call:
 
-	pci_unmap_sg(pdev, sglist, nents, direction);
+	dma_unmap_sg(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
 
 Again, make sure DMA activity has already finished.
 
-PLEASE NOTE:  The 'nents' argument to the pci_unmap_sg call must be
-              the _same_ one you passed into the pci_map_sg call,
+PLEASE NOTE:  The 'nents' argument to the dma_unmap_sg call must be
+              the _same_ one you passed into the dma_map_sg call,
 	      it should _NOT_ be the 'count' value _returned_ from the
-              pci_map_sg call.
+              dma_map_sg call.
 
-Every pci_map_{single,sg} call should have its pci_unmap_{single,sg}
+Every dma_map_{single,sg} call should have its dma_unmap_{single,sg}
 counterpart, because the bus address space is a shared resource (although
 in some ports the mapping is per each BUS so less devices contend for the
 same bus address space) and you could render the machine unusable by eating
@@ -547,14 +542,14 @@ the data in between the DMA transfers, the buffer needs to be synced
 properly in order for the cpu and device to see the most uptodate and
 correct copy of the DMA buffer.
 
-So, firstly, just map it with pci_map_{single,sg}, and after each DMA
+So, firstly, just map it with dma_map_{single,sg}, and after each DMA
 transfer call either:
 
-	pci_dma_sync_single_for_cpu(pdev, dma_handle, size, direction);
+	dma_sync_single_for_cpu(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
 
 or:
 
-	pci_dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(pdev, sglist, nents, direction);
+	dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
 
 as appropriate.
 
@@ -562,27 +557,27 @@ Then, if you wish to let the device get at the DMA area again,
 finish accessing the data with the cpu, and then before actually
 giving the buffer to the hardware call either:
 
-	pci_dma_sync_single_for_device(pdev, dma_handle, size, direction);
+	dma_sync_single_for_device(dev, dma_handle, size, direction);
 
 or:
 
-	pci_dma_sync_sg_for_device(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
+	dma_sync_sg_for_device(dev, sglist, nents, direction);
 
 as appropriate.
 
 After the last DMA transfer call one of the DMA unmap routines
-pci_unmap_{single,sg}. If you don't touch the data from the first pci_map_*
-call till pci_unmap_*, then you don't have to call the pci_dma_sync_*
+dma_unmap_{single,sg}. If you don't touch the data from the first dma_map_*
+call till dma_unmap_*, then you don't have to call the dma_sync_*
 routines at all.
 
 Here is pseudo code which shows a situation in which you would need
-to use the pci_dma_sync_*() interfaces.
+to use the dma_sync_*() interfaces.
 
 	my_card_setup_receive_buffer(struct my_card *cp, char *buffer, int len)
 	{
 		dma_addr_t mapping;
 
-		mapping = pci_map_single(cp->pdev, buffer, len, PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+		mapping = dma_map_single(cp->dev, buffer, len, DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 
 		cp->rx_buf = buffer;
 		cp->rx_len = len;
@@ -606,25 +601,25 @@ to use the pci_dma_sync_*() interfaces.
 			 * the DMA transfer with the CPU first
 			 * so that we see updated contents.
 			 */
-			pci_dma_sync_single_for_cpu(cp->pdev, cp->rx_dma,
-						    cp->rx_len,
-						    PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+			dma_sync_single_for_cpu(&cp->dev, cp->rx_dma,
+						cp->rx_len,
+						DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 
 			/* Now it is safe to examine the buffer. */
 			hp = (struct my_card_header *) cp->rx_buf;
 			if (header_is_ok(hp)) {
-				pci_unmap_single(cp->pdev, cp->rx_dma, cp->rx_len,
-						 PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+				dma_unmap_single(&cp->dev, cp->rx_dma, cp->rx_len,
+						 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 				pass_to_upper_layers(cp->rx_buf);
 				make_and_setup_new_rx_buf(cp);
 			} else {
 				/* Just sync the buffer and give it back
 				 * to the card.
 				 */
-				pci_dma_sync_single_for_device(cp->pdev,
-							       cp->rx_dma,
-							       cp->rx_len,
-							       PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+				dma_sync_single_for_device(&cp->dev,
+							   cp->rx_dma,
+							   cp->rx_len,
+							   DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 				give_rx_buf_to_card(cp);
 			}
 		}
@@ -634,19 +629,19 @@ Drivers converted fully to this interface should not use virt_to_bus any
 longer, nor should they use bus_to_virt. Some drivers have to be changed a
 little bit, because there is no longer an equivalent to bus_to_virt in the
 dynamic DMA mapping scheme - you have to always store the DMA addresses
-returned by the pci_alloc_consistent, pci_pool_alloc, and pci_map_single
-calls (pci_map_sg stores them in the scatterlist itself if the platform
+returned by the dma_alloc_coherent, dma_pool_alloc, and dma_map_single
+calls (dma_map_sg stores them in the scatterlist itself if the platform
 supports dynamic DMA mapping in hardware) in your driver structures and/or
 in the card registers.
 
-All PCI drivers should be using these interfaces with no exceptions.
-It is planned to completely remove virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() as
+All drivers should be using these interfaces with no exceptions.  It
+is planned to completely remove virt_to_bus() and bus_to_virt() as
 they are entirely deprecated.  Some ports already do not provide these
 as it is impossible to correctly support them.
 
 		Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
 
-On many platforms, pci_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
+On many platforms, dma_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
 Therefore, keeping track of the mapping address and length is a waste
 of space.  Instead of filling your drivers up with ifdefs and the like
 to "work around" this (which would defeat the whole purpose of a
@@ -655,7 +650,7 @@ portable API) the following facilities are provided.
 Actually, instead of describing the macros one by one, we'll
 transform some example code.
 
-1) Use DECLARE_PCI_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
+1) Use DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
    Example, before:
 
 	struct ring_state {
@@ -668,14 +663,11 @@ transform some example code.
 
 	struct ring_state {
 		struct sk_buff *skb;
-		DECLARE_PCI_UNMAP_ADDR(mapping)
-		DECLARE_PCI_UNMAP_LEN(len)
+		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_ADDR(mapping);
+		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_LEN(len);
 	};
 
-   NOTE: DO NOT put a semicolon at the end of the DECLARE_*()
-         macro.
-
-2) Use pci_unmap_{addr,len}_set to set these values.
+2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set to set these values.
    Example, before:
 
 	ringp->mapping = FOO;
@@ -683,21 +675,21 @@ transform some example code.
 
    after:
 
-	pci_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
-	pci_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
+	dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
+	dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
 
-3) Use pci_unmap_{addr,len} to access these values.
+3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len} to access these values.
    Example, before:
 
-	pci_unmap_single(pdev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
-			 PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+	dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
+			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 
    after:
 
-	pci_unmap_single(pdev,
-			 pci_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
-			 pci_unmap_len(ringp, len),
-			 PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE);
+	dma_unmap_single(dev,
+			 dma_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
+			 dma_unmap_len(ringp, len),
+			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
 
 It really should be self-explanatory.  We treat the ADDR and LEN
 separately, because it is possible for an implementation to only
@@ -732,15 +724,15 @@ to "Closing".
 DMA address space is limited on some architectures and an allocation
 failure can be determined by:
 
-- checking if pci_alloc_consistent returns NULL or pci_map_sg returns 0
+- checking if dma_alloc_coherent returns NULL or dma_map_sg returns 0
 
-- checking the returned dma_addr_t of pci_map_single and pci_map_page
-  by using pci_dma_mapping_error():
+- checking the returned dma_addr_t of dma_map_single and dma_map_page
+  by using dma_mapping_error():
 
 	dma_addr_t dma_handle;
 
-	dma_handle = pci_map_single(pdev, addr, size, direction);
-	if (pci_dma_mapping_error(pdev, dma_handle)) {
+	dma_handle = dma_map_single(dev, addr, size, direction);
+	if (dma_mapping_error(dev, dma_handle)) {
 		/*
 		 * reduce current DMA mapping usage,
 		 * delay and try again later or
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From f5a69f4c1319c03b946e1e99a590b6002aa3e5ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:43 -0800
Subject: Documentation: remove the PCI DMA API description in DMA-API.txt

- remove the PCI DMA API description in DMA-API.txt
- remove the descriptions of dma_unmap macros since
  PCI-DMA-mapping.txt has the same description.

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net>
Reviewed-by: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 152 +++++-----------------------------------------
 1 file changed, 15 insertions(+), 137 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 0fc5728ed487..5e018f67b409 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -4,20 +4,18 @@
         James E.J. Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
 
 This document describes the DMA API.  For a more gentle introduction
-phrased in terms of the pci_ equivalents (and actual examples) see
+of the API (and actual examples) see
 Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt.
 
-This API is split into two pieces.  Part I describes the API and the
-corresponding pci_ API.  Part II describes the extensions to the API
-for supporting non-consistent memory machines.  Unless you know that
-your driver absolutely has to support non-consistent platforms (this
-is usually only legacy platforms) you should only use the API
-described in part I.
+This API is split into two pieces.  Part I describes the API.  Part II
+describes the extensions to the API for supporting non-consistent
+memory machines.  Unless you know that your driver absolutely has to
+support non-consistent platforms (this is usually only legacy
+platforms) you should only use the API described in part I.
 
-Part I - pci_ and dma_ Equivalent API 
+Part I - dma_ API
 -------------------------------------
 
-To get the pci_ API, you must #include <linux/pci.h>
 To get the dma_ API, you must #include <linux/dma-mapping.h>
 
 
@@ -27,9 +25,6 @@ Part Ia - Using large dma-coherent buffers
 void *
 dma_alloc_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size,
 			     dma_addr_t *dma_handle, gfp_t flag)
-void *
-pci_alloc_consistent(struct pci_dev *dev, size_t size,
-			     dma_addr_t *dma_handle)
 
 Consistent memory is memory for which a write by either the device or
 the processor can immediately be read by the processor or device
@@ -53,15 +48,11 @@ The simplest way to do that is to use the dma_pool calls (see below).
 The flag parameter (dma_alloc_coherent only) allows the caller to
 specify the GFP_ flags (see kmalloc) for the allocation (the
 implementation may choose to ignore flags that affect the location of
-the returned memory, like GFP_DMA).  For pci_alloc_consistent, you
-must assume GFP_ATOMIC behaviour.
+the returned memory, like GFP_DMA).
 
 void
 dma_free_coherent(struct device *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
 			   dma_addr_t dma_handle)
-void
-pci_free_consistent(struct pci_dev *dev, size_t size, void *cpu_addr,
-			   dma_addr_t dma_handle)
 
 Free the region of consistent memory you previously allocated.  dev,
 size and dma_handle must all be the same as those passed into the
@@ -89,10 +80,6 @@ for alignment, like queue heads needing to be aligned on N-byte boundaries.
 	dma_pool_create(const char *name, struct device *dev,
 			size_t size, size_t align, size_t alloc);
 
-	struct pci_pool *
-	pci_pool_create(const char *name, struct pci_device *dev,
-			size_t size, size_t align, size_t alloc);
-
 The pool create() routines initialize a pool of dma-coherent buffers
 for use with a given device.  It must be called in a context which
 can sleep.
@@ -108,9 +95,6 @@ from this pool must not cross 4KByte boundaries.
 	void *dma_pool_alloc(struct dma_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
 			dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
 
-	void *pci_pool_alloc(struct pci_pool *pool, gfp_t gfp_flags,
-			dma_addr_t *dma_handle);
-
 This allocates memory from the pool; the returned memory will meet the size
 and alignment requirements specified at creation time.  Pass GFP_ATOMIC to
 prevent blocking, or if it's permitted (not in_interrupt, not holding SMP locks),
@@ -122,9 +106,6 @@ pool's device.
 	void dma_pool_free(struct dma_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
 			dma_addr_t addr);
 
-	void pci_pool_free(struct pci_pool *pool, void *vaddr,
-			dma_addr_t addr);
-
 This puts memory back into the pool.  The pool is what was passed to
 the pool allocation routine; the cpu (vaddr) and dma addresses are what
 were returned when that routine allocated the memory being freed.
@@ -132,8 +113,6 @@ were returned when that routine allocated the memory being freed.
 
 	void dma_pool_destroy(struct dma_pool *pool);
 
-	void pci_pool_destroy(struct pci_pool *pool);
-
 The pool destroy() routines free the resources of the pool.  They must be
 called in a context which can sleep.  Make sure you've freed all allocated
 memory back to the pool before you destroy it.
@@ -144,8 +123,6 @@ Part Ic - DMA addressing limitations
 
 int
 dma_supported(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
-int
-pci_dma_supported(struct pci_dev *hwdev, u64 mask)
 
 Checks to see if the device can support DMA to the memory described by
 mask.
@@ -159,8 +136,6 @@ driver writers.
 
 int
 dma_set_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
-int
-pci_set_dma_mask(struct pci_device *dev, u64 mask)
 
 Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
 parameters if it is.
@@ -169,8 +144,6 @@ Returns: 0 if successful and a negative error if not.
 
 int
 dma_set_coherent_mask(struct device *dev, u64 mask)
-int
-pci_set_consistent_dma_mask(struct pci_device *dev, u64 mask)
 
 Checks to see if the mask is possible and updates the device
 parameters if it is.
@@ -197,9 +170,6 @@ Part Id - Streaming DMA mappings
 dma_addr_t
 dma_map_single(struct device *dev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
 		      enum dma_data_direction direction)
-dma_addr_t
-pci_map_single(struct pci_dev *hwdev, void *cpu_addr, size_t size,
-		      int direction)
 
 Maps a piece of processor virtual memory so it can be accessed by the
 device and returns the physical handle of the memory.
@@ -208,14 +178,10 @@ The direction for both api's may be converted freely by casting.
 However the dma_ API uses a strongly typed enumerator for its
 direction:
 
-DMA_NONE		= PCI_DMA_NONE		no direction (used for
-						debugging)
-DMA_TO_DEVICE		= PCI_DMA_TODEVICE	data is going from the
-						memory to the device
-DMA_FROM_DEVICE		= PCI_DMA_FROMDEVICE	data is coming from
-						the device to the
-						memory
-DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL	= PCI_DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL	direction isn't known
+DMA_NONE		no direction (used for debugging)
+DMA_TO_DEVICE		data is going from the memory to the device
+DMA_FROM_DEVICE		data is coming from the device to the memory
+DMA_BIDIRECTIONAL	direction isn't known
 
 Notes:  Not all memory regions in a machine can be mapped by this
 API.  Further, regions that appear to be physically contiguous in
@@ -278,9 +244,6 @@ cache lines are updated with data that the device may have changed).
 void
 dma_unmap_single(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr, size_t size,
 		 enum dma_data_direction direction)
-void
-pci_unmap_single(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
-		 size_t size, int direction)
 
 Unmaps the region previously mapped.  All the parameters passed in
 must be identical to those passed in (and returned) by the mapping
@@ -290,15 +253,9 @@ dma_addr_t
 dma_map_page(struct device *dev, struct page *page,
 		    unsigned long offset, size_t size,
 		    enum dma_data_direction direction)
-dma_addr_t
-pci_map_page(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct page *page,
-		    unsigned long offset, size_t size, int direction)
 void
 dma_unmap_page(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_address, size_t size,
 	       enum dma_data_direction direction)
-void
-pci_unmap_page(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_address,
-	       size_t size, int direction)
 
 API for mapping and unmapping for pages.  All the notes and warnings
 for the other mapping APIs apply here.  Also, although the <offset>
@@ -309,9 +266,6 @@ cache width is.
 int
 dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
 
-int
-pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
-
 In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create
 a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned
 dma address with dma_mapping_error(). A non-zero return value means the mapping
@@ -321,9 +275,6 @@ reduce current DMA mapping usage or delay and try again later).
 	int
 	dma_map_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
 		int nents, enum dma_data_direction direction)
-	int
-	pci_map_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
-		int nents, int direction)
 
 Returns: the number of physical segments mapped (this may be shorter
 than <nents> passed in if some elements of the scatter/gather list are
@@ -363,9 +314,6 @@ accessed sg->address and sg->length as shown above.
 	void
 	dma_unmap_sg(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg,
 		int nhwentries, enum dma_data_direction direction)
-	void
-	pci_unmap_sg(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
-		int nents, int direction)
 
 Unmap the previously mapped scatter/gather list.  All the parameters
 must be the same as those and passed in to the scatter/gather mapping
@@ -378,26 +326,14 @@ void
 dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
 			enum dma_data_direction direction)
 void
-pci_dma_sync_single_for_cpu(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
-			    size_t size, int direction)
-void
 dma_sync_single_for_device(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_handle, size_t size,
 			   enum dma_data_direction direction)
 void
-pci_dma_sync_single_for_device(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_handle,
-			       size_t size, int direction)
-void
 dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
 		    enum dma_data_direction direction)
 void
-pci_dma_sync_sg_for_cpu(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
-		        int nelems, int direction)
-void
 dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct device *dev, struct scatterlist *sg, int nelems,
 		       enum dma_data_direction direction)
-void
-pci_dma_sync_sg_for_device(struct pci_dev *hwdev, struct scatterlist *sg,
-		           int nelems, int direction)
 
 Synchronise a single contiguous or scatter/gather mapping for the cpu
 and device. With the sync_sg API, all the parameters must be the same
@@ -482,70 +418,12 @@ void whizco_dma_map_sg_attrs(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr,
 	....
 
 
-Part Ie - Optimizing Unmap State Space Consumption
---------------------------------
-
-On some platforms, dma_unmap_{single,page}() is simply a nop.
-Therefore, keeping track of the mapping address and length is a waste
-of space. Instead of filling your drivers up with ifdefs and the like
-to "work around" this (which would defeat the whole purpose of a
-portable API) the following facilities are provided.
-
-Actually, instead of describing the macros one by one, we'll
-transform some example code.
-
-1) Use DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_{ADDR,LEN} in state saving structures.
-   Example, before:
-
-	struct ring_state {
-		struct sk_buff *skb;
-		dma_addr_t mapping;
-		__u32 len;
-	};
-
-   after:
-
-	struct ring_state {
-		struct sk_buff *skb;
-		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_ADDR(mapping);
-		DEFINE_DMA_UNMAP_LEN(len);
-	};
-
-2) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len}_set to set these values.
-   Example, before:
-
-	ringp->mapping = FOO;
-	ringp->len = BAR;
-
-   after:
-
-	dma_unmap_addr_set(ringp, mapping, FOO);
-	dma_unmap_len_set(ringp, len, BAR);
-
-3) Use dma_unmap_{addr,len} to access these values.
-   Example, before:
-
-	dma_unmap_single(dev, ringp->mapping, ringp->len,
-			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
-
-   after:
-
-	dma_unmap_single(dev,
-			 dma_unmap_addr(ringp, mapping),
-			 dma_unmap_len(ringp, len),
-			 DMA_FROM_DEVICE);
-
-It really should be self-explanatory.  We treat the ADDR and LEN
-separately, because it is possible for an implementation to only
-need the address in order to perform the unmap operation.
-
-
 Part II - Advanced dma_ usage
 -----------------------------
 
-Warning: These pieces of the DMA API have no PCI equivalent.  They
-should also not be used in the majority of cases, since they cater for
-unlikely corner cases that don't belong in usual drivers.
+Warning: These pieces of the DMA API should not be used in the
+majority of cases, since they cater for unlikely corner cases that
+don't belong in usual drivers.
 
 If you don't understand how cache line coherency works between a
 processor and an I/O device, you should not be using this part of the
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 51e7364ef281e540371f084008732b13292622f0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:44 -0800
Subject: Documentation: rename PCI-DMA-mapping.txt to DMA-API-HOWTO.txt

Signed-off-by: FUJITA Tomonori <fujita.tomonori@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Cc: James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@HansenPartnership.com>
Cc: "David S. Miller" <davem@davemloft.net>
Cc: Randy Dunlap <randy.dunlap@oracle.com>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/DMA-API.txt | 2 +-
 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 5e018f67b409..05e2ae236865 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 
 This document describes the DMA API.  For a more gentle introduction
 of the API (and actual examples) see
-Documentation/PCI/PCI-DMA-mapping.txt.
+Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt.
 
 This API is split into two pieces.  Part I describes the API.  Part II
 describes the extensions to the API for supporting non-consistent
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From b3e63afe8a74c0134d05a551cc74facc3b3ec0d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Date: Wed, 10 Mar 2010 15:23:45 -0800
Subject: ldisc: new dcd_change() method for line disciplines

Signed-off-by: Rodolfo Giometti <giometti@linux.it>
Cc: David Woodhouse <dwmw2@infradead.org>
Cc: Greg KH <greg@kroah.com>
Cc: Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
Cc: Alexander Gordeev <lasaine@lvk.cs.msu.su>
Signed-off-by: Andrew Morton <akpm@linux-foundation.org>
Signed-off-by: Linus Torvalds <torvalds@linux-foundation.org>
---
 Documentation/serial/tty.txt | 4 ++++
 1 file changed, 4 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
index 5e5349a4fcd2..7c900507279f 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
+++ b/Documentation/serial/tty.txt
@@ -105,6 +105,10 @@ write_wakeup()	-	May be called at any point between open and close.
 			is permitted to call the driver write method from
 			this function. In such a situation defer it.
 
+dcd_change()	-	Report to the tty line the current DCD pin status
+			changes and the relative timestamp. The timestamp
+			can be NULL.
+
 
 Driver Access
 
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 4c81ba4900ab4eb24c7d2ba1aca594c644b6ce4c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
Date: Sun, 14 Mar 2010 16:28:46 -0400
Subject: ACPI: plan to delete "acpi=ht" boot option

Signed-off-by: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
---
 Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt | 7 +++++++
 1 file changed, 7 insertions(+)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index a5cc0db63d7a..ed511af0f79a 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -582,3 +582,10 @@ Why:	The paravirt mmu host support is slower than non-paravirt mmu, both
 Who:	Avi Kivity <avi@redhat.com>
 
 ----------------------------
+
+What: 	"acpi=ht" boot option
+When:	2.6.35
+Why:	Useful in 2003, implementation is a hack.
+	Generally invoked by accident today.
+	Seen as doing more harm than good.
+Who:	Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
-- 
cgit v1.2.1


From 3b1da4c5d1032ebc29fec8bd8f592ba6589be8ed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Alex Chiang <achiang@hp.com>
Date: Mon, 22 Feb 2010 12:11:34 -0700
Subject: ACPI: processor: remove early _PDC optin quirks

Now that we check for physically present processors before blindly
evaluating _PDC, we no longer need to maintain a DMI opt-in table
nor a kernel param.

Acked-by: Venkatesh Pallipadi <venkatesh.pallipadi@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Alex Chiang <achiang@hp.com>
Signed-off-by: Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com>
---
 Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt | 4 ----
 1 file changed, 4 deletions(-)

(limited to 'Documentation')

diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 3bc48b0bd3a9..e4cbca58536c 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -200,10 +200,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
 			acpi_display_output=video
 			See above.
 
-	acpi_early_pdc_eval	[HW,ACPI] Evaluate processor _PDC methods
-				early. Needed on some platforms to properly
-				initialize the EC.
-
 	acpi_irq_balance [HW,ACPI]
 			ACPI will balance active IRQs
 			default in APIC mode
-- 
cgit v1.2.1